Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. and residential. you will use the default template. For most tutorial projects. and plans. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. every drawing sheet. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. In this case. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design.rte. click Training Files. sections. and schedules required for a building project. review the Revit Architecture templates. drawing sheets. the door retains this relationship to the partition. If the length of the elevation is changed. In this case. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 13 Click OK. and click Open. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. and phases when you need it. and customize the project as necessary. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and open Metric\Templates. how to navigate the user interface. the operation of the software is parametric. scope. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. 2D and 3D view. hence. If you move the partition. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. You learn the terminology. As you work in drawing and schedule views. schedules. the parameter is one of association or connection. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. 12 Select DefaultMetric. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the floor or roof remains connected. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. construction.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. In the Revit Architecture model. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. drawings. quantities. the hierarchy of elements.

For example. filled regions. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. programming is not required. dimensions. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. windows. levels. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. For example. dimensions. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. tags. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. and 2D detail components. They help to describe or document the model. walls. and cabinets are model components. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. doors.When you change something. tags. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. For example. doors. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Understanding the Basics | 7 . Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. They display in relevant views of the model. grids. windows. Examples include detail lines. walls and roofs are hosts. If you can draw.

the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. for example. top of wall. and so forth). In other cases. However. Often. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. and ceilings. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. schedules. you can explicitly control them. To place levels. such as roofs. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. for example. floors. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. or bottom of foundation. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. section views. and types. The project file contains all information for the building design. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. This information includes components used to design the model. families. Most often.In Revit Architecture. views of the project. you must be in a section or elevation view. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. By using a single project file. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. and drawings of the design. from geometry to construction data. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Project: In Revit Architecture. first floor. elevation views. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls.

such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. System families can be transferred between projects. System families include walls. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A type can also be a style. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. roofs. For example. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. identical use. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). In the following illustration. floors. making it easy to understand what each button represents. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. the user interface is labeled. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. ceilings. specifically its clear user interface. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. and levels. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. In the steps that follow. A type can be a specific size of a family. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. For example. However. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. and similar graphical representation. dimensions. categories of model elements include walls and beams. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category.

Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. By default. click (New). 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . This creates a new project based on the default template. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. In addition.

Edit. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. While working in the drawing area. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. you type the required key combination to perform the command. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. and View. For example. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. which are listed on the menu. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. a door type is specified. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. On the left side of the Options Bar. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . when you add a door. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. 9 In the Type Selector. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. When you select the Door tool. For example.

The Show Design Bars dialog displays. immediately below the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . In the drawing area. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.

TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. select Views (all). In the Project Browser. click the tab in the Design Bar.11 Click OK. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The respective commands display on the Design Bar.

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. To open a view. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and groups. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. families. 3D). ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. and rename views. windows). schedules. double-click its name. and group name. reports. delete. sheets. elevations. The browser is dockable. families. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. walls. family category (doors. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

click Wall." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Do not click. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click Cancel. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. The cursor displays as a pencil. In the bottom left corner of the window. In this case. After creating a browser organization scheme.

You can select a topic on the Contents tab. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. 20 Press TAB. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. If no Help button displays. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. click on the Standard toolbar. click Modify to end the Wall command. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. There are several tools that help you find information. press F1 for help. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). In addition. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help.18 On the Design Bar. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. Toolbar: From the toolbar. find a keyword on the Index tab. regarding selected elements in a view. After you are familiar with these tasks. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. You can also press SHIFT+F1. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. press F1 for context-sensitive help. Windows: From any window. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. in conjunction with tooltips. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. The status bar also provides information. Tooltips: To see tooltips. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. In the status bar. Click the Help button. When you place the cursor over an element. You can use this tri-pane. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays.

Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). click Training Files. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. In the drawing area. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 On the View toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. In the following steps. For example. the view zooms out from the building model. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. There are several ways to access zoom options. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.rvt. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys.

use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. NOTE As you zoom in and out. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 7 Click in the drawing area. on the View toolbar. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. To modify or add snap increments. As you move the mouse. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. . this is referred to as a crossing selection. 10 To display SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 .

Cnst. and click the SteeringWheels tab.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. bottoms. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. expand Views (all). When drawing or modifying a building model. and click Help. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. display along the ends. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 17 Type ZR. referred to as shape handles. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. These are the drag controls. press ESC. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. For more information about SteeringWheels. and double-click 2nd Flr. as shown. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. moving the wheel to the desired location. and then using the Zoom tool again. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. Small blue dots. 15 To exit the wheel. and select the wall. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. expand Floor Plans. called drag controls. click Settings menu ➤ Options. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Similar controls.

and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. require 2 clicks to complete the command. In this case. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. as shown. and on the Tools toolbar. Some commands. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. click to specify the starting position. for example. 23 Click next to the lower wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. The table moves down. such as Move and Copy. and click again to specify the ending position. you want to move the table closer to the wall. After selecting the element to move. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall.18 Click and drag the left control. click (Move). to lengthen the wall.

All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. select the second item in the list.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. such as the Lines command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. click Lines. click the Undo command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. on the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. and click again to end it. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. 24 Select the plant. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Some commands. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. In this example. Move. and drag it on top of the table. 26 On the Undo menu. or press CTRL+Z. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines.

click Modify. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. On the Design Bar. Press ESC twice. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 .29 To end the command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

but for training purposes. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. 27 . Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. detail.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. When you have finished these tutorials. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. In Revit Architecture. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. Use detail components to define an assembly. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. In this tutorial. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. and annotate building assemblies. this tutorial uses imperial units only. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. or referenced as a drafting view. illustrating how building components work together.

■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. for Name. 3 In the Scale list. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and reference a drafting view. enter Window Head Detail. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. import a DWG detail. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. create a reference callout. If necessary. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Drafting View. you will create a drafting view. and click OK.rvt.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. scroll until the folder is displayed.

NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. select Black and White. located directly to the left of the drawing area. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. The drawing area is still blank. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 10 In the drawing area. click Training Files. The model zooms out. as shown.dwg. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser.In the Project Browser. and click Open. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 9 Type ZR. 6 In the Colors field list. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 .). displaying the extents of the detail.

in the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. to activate the view selection list. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Detail View: Detail. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail.The view displays to the specified area. 14 In the drawing area. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. click Callout. and in the Scale list. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 13 Click Reference other view.

linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. c_express_workshop_details_start. select Callout. select Detail View: Detail.The reference callout is created. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. you will create a detail view defined by a callout.rvt. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. 3 In the drawing area. double-click the reference callout tag head. adjust the detail view display settings. 2 On the Options Bar. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. and in the Scale list. in the Type Selector.

and click Rename. double-click Wall Base 1. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Rename View dialog. 4 Right-click Detail 0.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Detail). select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. under Detail Views(Detail). for Name. and click OK. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter Wall Base 1. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 6 In the drawing area. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify to clear the selection.

Model-Based Detailing | 33 . This is the view crop region. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. bordered by a solid line.

12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the drawing area. and click View Properties. right-click. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. under Graphics. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 16 Click OK. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 13 On the View Control Bar. for Display Model. and click OK. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click (Hide Crop Region). select As Underlay.

Brick on Mtl. 20 In the drawing area. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . click Detail Components. Directly above the drawing area. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . 17 On the View Control Bar. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. typical details can easily be placed. 21 Move the cursor up slightly.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. By grouping detail components. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. Stud. If the crop region is enlarged. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. and press ENTER. type 1' 6''.

26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. 23 Using the same method.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 25 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. add the following detail components as shown. and click Create Instance. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. as shown. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

4" Slab detail. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.28 Press ESC to end the command. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .

txt. consistent means of identifying building assembly components.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. and under Keynote Table. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Leader. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. 4 On the Options Bar. in the type selector. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail.rvt. and format keynote styles. c_express_workshop_details_start. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. For more information about customizing a keynote database. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. special notes. click Training Files. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. click Keynote ➤ Element. In the next exercise. click Browse. for Full Path. and verify that Horizontal. or instructions within a construction documentation package. map keynotes by material. You can customize this list. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and Free End are selected.

7 Click to place the leader arm. a question mark displays. 8 Click to place the tag. Either move the text inside. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Keynoting | 39 .3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. If no value has been specified. or increase the size of the annotation crop region.5 In the drawing area. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . If you would like to complete keynoting the detail.

16 In the drawing area. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 13 Click to place the tag.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. and click OK. click Keynote ➤ Material. 15 Select 07 21 00.

Creating Details with Revit Architecture. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Click Check None. 17 On the Options Bar. Select Keynote Tags. 19 In the Type Selector. legends. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values.Boxed. Click OK. Only the keynotes remain selected.All items within the selection display in red. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views.

and modify and update the project sheet title block. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. Place views on drawing sheets. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. In this lesson. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. Add labels to a title block. In this exercise.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. update the project information element properties. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. but for training purposes. this tutorial uses imperial units only. you will create a sheet. Update drawing sheet and project information.

the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. In Revit Architecture.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. In the Project Browser. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll until the folder is displayed.rvt. 3 Click OK. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. or in the element properties of the title block. click Training Files. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. If necessary.

44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 8 On the Design Bar. To pan. Smith and press ENTER. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. Click OK. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. In this tutorial. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. To zoom in and out. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. enter A602. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. roll the wheel. 7 Enter K. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. hold down the wheel and drag. 5 In the drawing area.Unnamed. 6 In the Title Block. and click Rename.4 Type ZR. you can enter ZE to zoom out. click Modify to clear the selection. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. double-click Checker. 9 In the Project Browser. enter Sections/Details. For Name. Then. under Sheets(all). You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. right-click A602 . enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number.

For Project Status. click Text. 16 Type ZR. For Client Name. 13 Click OK. select Text : 1/8''. (Left) is selected. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . select the title block. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 18 On the Options Bar. enter 4/10/2008. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. in the Type Selector. Smith. The Family Editor opens. enter Design Development. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 17 On the Design Bar. enter Freighthouse Flats. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. 15 In the Options Bar. 20 Click and type Project Status. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. For Project Name. enter J.

add Project Issue Date parameter. 29 On the Design Bar. as shown. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. select Label : 3/16''. to add 28 Using the same method. as shown. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. click (Load into Project). and click. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. in the Type Selector. and verify that (Top) are selected. and click OK. click Modify to exit the command.21 On the Design Bar. under Category Parameters. click Label. 23 On the Design Bar. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. 22 Using the same method. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

for Full Path. click Browse. for Name. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes.txt. a viewport displays.30 In the Reload Family dialog. to a drawing sheet. click Training Files. representing the view or schedule. select Override parameter values of existing types. place and modify a keynote legend. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend.Project. and under Keynote Table. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. you will create. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. Next you will create. In this exercise. enter Keynote Legend . Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. and click Yes.

on the Appearance tab. under Text.Sections/Details. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. double-click A601 . and drag Keynote Legend . TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. expand Legends. as shown. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. clear Show Headers.

The keynote legend is visible.Project as shown. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .9 Press ESC to clear the selection. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR.

19 Click OK twice.Sheet. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. and click OK. click Edit. at the bottom of the Filter tab. and click Properties. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. for Filter. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . as shown. enter Keynote Legend . right-click Keynote Legend .Project. not keynotes. under Legends. 15 In the Project Browser. select Filter by sheet. expand Detail Views (Detail). Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. The Keynote Legend is now blank. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. and click OK. for View Name. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown.

The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). and then add and update a Drawing list. The view title with line displays below the viewport. 2 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet 1. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. as shown. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise.The keynote legend is automatically updated. The view remains selected. double-click A0 . displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 .

by default. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. as shown. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. 6 Type ZR. Revit Architecture displays a view title. You can specify text attributes for view titles. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. expand Schedules/Quantities. As part of a construction document set. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. 3 In the Type Selector. The drawing list remains selected. and zoom in on the drawing list. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Press ESC to clear the selection. or omit view titles from sheets.When you place a view on a sheet. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. define the information to include in a view title. 5 In the Project Browser. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list.

and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. clear Appears In Drawing List.Sections/Details and select A801 .Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. while pressing SHIFT. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . including only sheets that contain views. under Sheets (all). NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. right-click the selected sheets. The drawing list display is updated. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture.Ceiling Plans. select A602 . and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

For example. After the beginning exercises. the wall or column will move with it. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. a curtain wall. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. As you develop the building design. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. it is good practice to test the constraints. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. 57 . a central service core. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. If the grid moves.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial.

and residential. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. To create the project file. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. Creating the Project In this exercise. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. In practice. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 Under Template file. click New. you load any required family type that is not in your project. East. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. under Projects. but contains no geometry. 2 In the New Project dialog. West. and click Browse. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. from the product library. such as a door or window. under Create new. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. and customize the project as necessary. For this project. you use a template that is provided with the software. South. The project is stored as a single file. verify that the second option is selected. or by opening the view in the Project Browser.rte. select Project. you design inside the elevation markers. notice four elevation markers. you will use the default template. construction. click Training Files. locate the Project Browser. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. with an RVT extension.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. The new project opens. In views that display elevation markers. and settings. levels. views. In the drawing area in the right pane. 5 Click OK.

and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. delete. and other properties. such as schedules and legends. Ceiling Plans. and elevation views created in the project by the template. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South. change their properties. and on the General tab. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. the view you see in the drawing area. double-click Metric. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. view the Save reminder interval. Sheets (all). verify that Project Files (*. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. As you design and document your building model. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. heights.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. notice the Legends. reflected ceiling plan views. Families. Two level lines. display in the south elevation. expand Views (all). duplicate them. enter Revit Retail Building. and Elevations (Building Elevation). NOTE If you create a project without a template. and duplicate levels. 15 For Save as type. You can add. then expand Floor Plans. Schedules/Quantities. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. content and building model reports. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 14 For File name. and families in your project. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. you will want to save your work frequently. Creating the Project | 59 . These views are customizable: you can rename them. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. as well as change their names. and click Training Files. 8 Under Floor Plans. will be accessible from the Project Browser. 16 Click Save. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. Groups. schedules. created by the template. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. sheets.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. and delete them. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. 7 If necessary. 13 In the file window.rvt) is selected.

you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. so that when one level moves. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. After you modify the two default levels. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. and press ENTER. You learn how the levels are locked. to each other. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. enter 00 Foundation. When you begin designing. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. expand Views (all). you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. the other levels move and change with it. Adding Project Levels on page 60. doors. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. or constrained.17 Proceed to the next exercise. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Project Levels In this exercise. and windows within the building model. and double-click South. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). You change the names of the 2 default levels. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text.

Next. Adding Project Levels | 61 . 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. When you add the new level. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. If it does not. enter -1800. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This is the Options Bar. enter 0. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. and press ESC. and press ENTER. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. enter 01 Entry Level. 14 Click Plan View Types. and then move it up. 13 On the Options Bar. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. 5 In the Project Browser. click Level. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. not all the tabs are visible. and click Basics. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. By default. and press ENTER. As you move the cursor. 16 Enter 3750. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. and click OK. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. view the Design Bar. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. which should display by default. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. right-click. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels.

26 Press ESC. 21 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. enter 3750. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. click Level. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. you add another level. click Rename.18 In the Project Browser. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. and for Offset. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. click (Pick Lines). or on the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. If you create a level by copying it. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 25 Click to place the level line. using a different option. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. and move it slightly upward. Next. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. 19 Click OK. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. right-click Level 3. and enter 02 Level. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and rename the corresponding views. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line.

as shown. If you select a level and click its lock. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Adding Project Levels | 63 . Creating a Column Grid on page 64. the levels are no longer constrained. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Notice that by moving the top level. all the levels move. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. and you can move them independently.

until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. specify a start point for the grid line. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. double-click 00 Foundation. Move the cursor up. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. When the grid is complete. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. the column height changes as well. On the Design Bar. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. so that if the roof elevation changes. click Grid. and specify the grid line endpoint. In a later exercise. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. select (Draw). Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. In the following exercise.

and for Offset. enter 4500 mm. Click to place the grid line. for Offset. Enter A. and click to place the line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. On the Options Bar. enter 7500 mm. and press ENTER. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. for Offset. and click to place the line. enter 7500 mm. Next. On the Options Bar. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. click Grid. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click (Pick Lines). and click to place the line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar.

specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. as shown. click Grid. click Grid. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm.8 Press ESC. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. 11 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. and specify the grid line endpoint. On the Options Bar.

Creating a Column Grid | 67 . click Dimension. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 18 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Starting with grid line A. click (Aligned). select grid lines C and 3. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 21 Press ESC twice. 22 While pressing CTRL. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed.

select grid line 5. enter 50mm. and on the Options Bar. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. 24 Press ESC. and press ESC. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. and select grid line A. click Modify. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. click . At the left endpoint of the grid line. 32 Click OK twice. and click OK. Two pins display on the grid lines. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New.5mm Bubble with Gap. click Duplicate. 31 For End Segments Length. click Modify. until it is closer to grid line 5. The pins are hidden. By pinning these central grid lines.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 26 In the drawing area. until it is closer to grid line A. enter 6. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. If necessary. (Element Properties). click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. click and drag the blue circular grip up. and press ESC. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click the value for Center Segment. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 29 In the Name dialog. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and select None.

34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. click Finish. click Modify. The original continuous grid lines are restored. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . and press ESC. select Grid : 6. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. click (Grid Intersection). 37 Select the grid lines again. select all of the grid lines. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. 36 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. and in the Type Selector. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). click Structural Column. select Grid : 6. 39 In the Type Selector. 35 In the Type Selector. For Place By.5mm Bubble.5mm Bubble with Gap.

51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 47 Enter 9000. select grid line A. click Activate Dimensions. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 48 On the Standard toolbar. for From. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. 45 While pressing CTRL. under Floor Plans. 46 On the Options Bar. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. Next. and unlock it. 52 On the Options Bar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. click Camera. If it is unlocked. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. lock it. double-click 01 Entry Level. 43 Press ESC. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. and press ENTER. select 01 Entry Level. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and click to place the target point of the camera. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.

you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. and then copy them to subsequent levels. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. Right-click 3D View 1. expand 3D Views. under Views (all). When you finish adding beams. and click OK. and click Rename. enter To Building. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. In the Rename View dialog. The current view. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. Adding Beams on page 72. Adding Beams In this exercise. displays in bold under 3D Views. named 3D View 1 by default. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

6 In the Type Selector. 8 While pressing CTRL. 9 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 7 On the Options Bar. click Beam. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. under Floor Plans. the icon on the right side of the scale. click (Create Beam On Grid). Adding Beams | 73 . select each grid line. The selected grid lines display as red. 4 Click Medium.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Finish. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. The view is currently set to Coarse. view the icons on the View Control Bar. 10 In the Project Browser.

under Floor Plans. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 On the Design Bar. and click Select All Instances. select 02 Level. double-click 01 Entry Level. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 14 Select one of the beams. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. press and hold SHIFT. select 06 Roof. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. right-click. click Modify. 12 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). and click OK. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines.

to the 5th level. and click Select All Instances. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. When you created the columns. Adding Beams | 75 . right-click. and click Element Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 With the column selected. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. resize the view to see the entire structure. for Top Level. 22 On the Options Bar. (Element Properties). 06 Roof. under Constraints. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. double-click To Building. click 24 Press ESC. and click OK. view the Top Level parameter. 20 Click Cancel. select 06 Roof. and if necessary. under 3D Views. All of the columns display as red. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. 25 In the Project Browser. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. right-click. under Instance Parameters.

28 Save the drawing. as lines only. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. under Elevations. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click South.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. but you want to display them in less detail. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. press ESC to exit the command before continuing.

Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. you create 8 framing elevation views. and press ESC to end the command. Adding Braces | 77 . under Floor Plans.29 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Braces on page 77. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. To better add the braces to the structure. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. click Framing Elevation. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. Adding Braces In this exercise.

and click to specify the endpoint of the brace.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. press ESC twice. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. click to specify the start point of the brace. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. After you add the final brace. 8 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar. click Brace. The associated framing elevation view displays. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. and when the endpoint snap displays. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. double-click the elevation marker arrow. 11 Using the same technique. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. but when placed the braces are placed. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements.

delete it and redraw it. Adding Braces | 79 . and press ENTER. enter 18000 mm. The height of the roof lowers. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level.

enter 10000 mm. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. under Floor Plans. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 00 Foundation. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Standard toolbar. but this time add them from right to left. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. and press ENTER. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow.13 Double-click the 04 Level height.

open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. 21 Select grid line A. and on the Options Bar. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. double-click 00 Foundation. click Activate Dimensions. enter 12000 mm.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 23 In the Project Browser. NOTE As you add braces. 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Adding Braces | 81 . as shown in the 3D view below. and press ENTER.

25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. and drag it away from the structure. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. Creating a Foundation on page 82. 31 Save the drawing. under 3D Views. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 29 In the Project Browser. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Test connectivity of the columns. double-click {3D}. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground.24 In the Project Browser. click and roof height. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click South. grid size. under Floor Plans. 28 On the Standard toolbar. under Elevations. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. and if necessary. lock it. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 26 In the Project Browser. beams.

where you must adjust the view range before you can see them.Before you can add the pile caps. for View Range. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. and drag it to the drawing area. After you load the pile cap family. and expand Structural Foundations. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. The pile cap has been added in the view. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. under Extents. select Unlimited. double-click 00 Foundation. A warning displays.rfa. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. and how to load specific families into a project. Click OK twice. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). In the View Range dialog. click Training Files. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click View Properties. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. In the Element Properties dialog. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. Creating a Foundation | 83 . under Floor Plans. expand Families. 9 Close the warning dialog. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. The foundation pile cap now displays. and press ESC twice. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. under View Depth. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. click Edit. for Level.

under 3D Views. and click Create Similar. 13 In the Project Browser. press ESC twice. When the final pile cap is placed. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation.

It is not available in a perspective or camera view. 2 Select one of the columns. right-click. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure.14 Close the file with or without saving it. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. and brace families into the project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under 3D Views. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. double-click {3D}. click Training Files.rvt. beams. and braces that you used to create the building structure. you change the types of the columns. You load new column. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. and click Select All Instances. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. beam. All columns in the building model display as red. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 .

2X101. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Brace.6X15. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. click (Element Properties). 16 On the Design Bar. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. the braces as well as the beams change. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). and click OK twice. This not the size that you want to use. and click Select All Instances. under Dimensions. click Edit/New. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. and changing its size parameter. select M_Round Bar : 25mm.5CHS. click Modify. click Duplicate. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. click Modify. 17 While pressing CTRL.3 In the Type Selector. double-click Elevation 1-a.9. for d. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the following steps. 9 In the Type Selector. The building model displays the round hollow columns. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. you change the brace type. 6 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Name dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. right-click. enter 75mm. The brace type changes. 4 On the Design Bar. for Type. select the braces in the elevation one by one. click Modify. 18 In the Type Selector. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. 7 On the Design Bar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 19 On the Design Bar. enter 75mm. click (Default 3D View). select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model.

Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. select Auto . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. 3 Under Positioning. Linking the Structural Model on page 87.rvt. and click Open. click Training Files. After the files are linked. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. select m_RRB_structure_complete.Origin to Origin. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog.rvt.

select the linked Revit model. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. In this case. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. 6 In the drawing area. click Copy. under Elevations. while pressing CTRL. double-click South. 8 On the Options Bar. depending on the project. click (Copy/Monitor). After the link is established. Grids. structural members. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. and walls could also be copy/monitored. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. and click Select Link. 5 On the Tools toolbar. select Levels 00 through 06. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .4 In the Project Browser. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. select Multiple. 9 In the drawing area. however.

The 06 Roof floor plan opens. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. while pressing SHIFT. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. for Floor Plan views. 16 Click OK. click Finish mode. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. right-click Level 1. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. and click Delete. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. 15 In the New Plan dialog. 18 Using the same method. delete the Level 2 floor plan.10 On the Options Bar. First. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . click OK. under Floor Plans. click Finish. 13 On the Design Bar.

double-click 00 Foundation. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 25 In the View Templates dialog. under Floor Plans. right-click. 20 In the drawing area. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1.19 In the Project Browser. enter Floor Plans. 26 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. for Name. right-click. under Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. 24 In the New View Template dialog. select the Topography : Surface. and click OK. 21 In the drawing area.

adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. 34 In the 3D view that displays. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . under Floor Plans. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. under Names. click Camera. and click OK. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. select Floor Plans.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and click OK.35 In the Project Browser. 36 In the Rename View dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. expand 3D Views. click Training Files. In this exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click 3D View 1. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding Floors In this exercise. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Floors on page 92. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. enter To Building. stairs. and click Rename. such as roofs. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Some other Revit Architecture elements. and railings are also created from sketches. To create floors.

under Floor Plans. click Lines. Do not lock the dimension. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. double-click 01 Entry Level. and then the first horizontal grid line. select the top floor line. Move the cursor to the left. click Dimension. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. Leave this dimension unlocked. At the top left corner of the grid. You are now in the Sketch Editor. and elements in the current view display as gray. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. click Floor. past the first vertical grid line. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Adding Floors | 93 . On the Options Bar. On the Sketch tab. If the grid changes size.

select the top floor line. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. click Modify.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. and click the temporary dimension value. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. and then press ESC. Enter 300. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. press ENTER. Do not lock the dimensions. and change their values to 300 mm. Move the cursor to the left dimension. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . They display on the floor sketch. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. At the top left corner of the grid. Select and lock the dimensions. click Finish Sketch to create the floor.

click (Pick Lines). click Quit Sketch. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. under Floor Plans. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. On the Options Bar. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. on the Design Bar. Next. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. enter 1500mm. click Floor. click Edit. and for Offset. using a different sketching technique. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor.8 Select the floor. On the Sketch tab. Select the three remaining floor lines. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. Adding Floors | 95 . The 02 Level floor sketch displays. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. double-click 02 Level. and lock the dimensions. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. and press ESC.

click (Rectangle). 17 On the Sketch tab. click (Align).13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and a lock icon displays. 20 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Design Bar. The 02 Level floor displays. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 18 On the Options Bar. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. click Finish Sketch. click Floor. double-click 03 Level. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view.

The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. click Finish Sketch. click Finish Sketch. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. 32 Select the floor. click Edit. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 31 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. and lock the edges. Alternatively. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. select 05 Roof Garden. Adding Floors | 97 . 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans. double-click {3D}.24 On the Design Bar. under Views ➤ 3D Views. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. double-click 01 Entry Level. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. and on the Options Bar. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 35 On the Sketch tab.

You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 37 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. To create the roof. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. When a blue dashed line displays.rvt. click Lines. Adding a Roof on page 98. Adding a Roof In this exercise. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 06 Roof. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. 3 On the Design Bar.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. Click (Pick Lines). enter 1800 mm. ■ ■ For Offset. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. click to place the roof line. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E.

enter 300 mm. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). click to place the roof line. for Offset.6 Select grid line 5. and when the blue dashed line displays. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. Adding a Roof | 99 . 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). 7 On the Options Bar.

click Finish Roof. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. ■ 12 On the Design Bar.10 Press ESC. select the roof. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Trim/Extend). and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5.

The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. 17 On the Design Bar. Adding a Roof | 101 . and press ENTER.14 On the Options Bar. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. and click to specify the section. click Modify. for Elevation. move the cursor down below the roof. click (Add new points to the slab shape). 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. on grid D. click Section. enter -100 mm.

click Edit/New. select the roof. (Element Properties). The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog.20 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. for Structure [1]. In section. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 24 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. for Structure. click Modify. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit. double-click 06 Roof. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Construction. select Variable. 30 Click OK 3 times. 28 In the Type Properties dialog.

on the View Control Bar. click Modify. 37 If necessary. In this case. zoom in to the roof. moving counter-clockwise. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window.31 On the Design Bar.Roof Edge. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. click (Default 3D View). select the section line. 41 Starting with the left front edge. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select each edge. 38 In the 3D view. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. 40 In the Type Selector. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. 33 In the warning dialog. Adding a Roof | 103 . click OK. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. select Fascia : Fascia . and press DELETE. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. 44 Proceed to the next exercise.42 On the Design Bar. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. you add a curtain wall. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Modify. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. so if you resize the grid. double-click To Building. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. under 3D Views. the curtain wall resizes with it.

For Level. for Join Condition. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice.rvt. 6 In the Name dialog. click Wall. click Duplicate. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click 01 Entry Level. click Edit/New. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. enter 600 mm. for Spacing. When you duplicate a type. and click OK. enter Retail Storefront. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Type Selector. enter 2100 mm. and move it slightly toward the building interior. For Offset. Under Construction. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). under Floor Plans. for Type. select 05 Roof Garden.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select 01 Entry Level. click Training Files. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 1050 mm. The type is saved in the project. for Spacing. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. For Height. click to place the first curtain wall segment. select Curtain Wall : Storefront.

These dimensions are not in a sketch. If you want to hide them. 15 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. double-click To Building. click Dimension. so they remain in the view. If the grid moves. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Trim/Extend). dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. and lock the dimensions. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and trim each curtain wall segment. you can delete the dimensions. under 3D Views. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it.

and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating an Entrance on page 107. Creating an Entrance | 107 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. Creating an Entrance In this exercise.

and click None. 4 On the Model Categories tab. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. 7 Click OK. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. Do not select Columns. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). click All. All the elements in the list are selected. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear one element to clear all the elements. 5 Under Visibility. 6 Under Visibility. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. To better work with the curtain wall panels. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under the element list. and double-click South.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.

and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. Creating an Entrance | 109 . press and hold CTRL. 17 In the Project Browser. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. 18 On the View Control Bar. double-click {3D}. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Modify. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. 10 Select 1 panel. 16 On the View Control Bar. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for.9 On the Design Bar. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. select Architectural Elevation. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select System Panel : Solid. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 12 With the panels selected. and click OK. in this case an architectural elevation.

under 3D Views. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. double-click South.19 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click To Building.

and unpin it. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. Creating an Entrance | 111 .23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Curtain Grid. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. click Add or Remove Segments. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 27 On the Options Bar. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 32 In the Type Selector. and click to select it. select One Segment. select another mullion to the right.

37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and unpin it.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. and view the new entrance. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 34 On the View toolbar. press TAB until it is selected. select it. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. click (Default 3D View).

Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. 40 Optionally. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . open the North elevation. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. and 4th panels. 39 Using the same process. remove the mullions from the 2nd. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance.38 Press DELETE. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 3rd. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click View Properties. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 3 Right-click in the view. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Underlay. select 02 Level. under Graphics. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.rvt. 5 Click OK. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building.

Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . enter Display Area. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. and click OK. select the grip closest to the callout head. 9 In the Project Browser. and click to complete the callout.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. 8 Select the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. and click Rename. click Callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. 10 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. which indicates you must draw the callout.

15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. 16 Select the section box. and click Flip Section. click Section.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 12 Draw a section line. 13 Select the section line. right-click. 14 Press ESC. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

click Dimension. click (Align). Lock both alignments. 24 On the Tools toolbar. Click (Rectangle).17 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Finish Face: Exterior. 18 In the Rename View dialog. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 25 Press ESC twice. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . double-click 01 Entry Level. expand Sections (Building Section). 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click Rename. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. select Basic Wall : Interior . select Wall faces. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. and click OK. right-click Section 1. enter Section Display Area. click Wall. for Prefer. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 21 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Design Bar.135mm Partition (2-hr). For Loc Line.

select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. and lock the dimension. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Section Display Area. 37 In the Project Browser. click Ceiling. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 32 In the Type Selector. under Sections (Building Section). under Ceiling Plans.) 36 Press ESC twice. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. 38 On the View Control Bar. and lock the dimension. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Next. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. you modify them to be bulkhead walls.

click Modify. and click (Element Properties). 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. enter 2700 mm. On the Options Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. 46 Press ESC. click Attach. double-click 01 Entry Level. enter 2700 mm. click (Element Properties). click to select it. and click OK. under Constraints.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. under Ceiling Plans. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. Select the 02 Level Floor. for Height Offset From Level. for Base Offset. and press ESC. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. 47 In the Project Browser. under Sections. double-click Section Display Area. for Top/Base. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. and click to select the walls. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. 43 On the Design Bar. press TAB until you select the wall chain. under Constraints. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . and click to select the walls.

59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. for Structure. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. view the ceiling structure. and click . under Ceiling Plans. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. click (Rotate). click Edit. click Edit/New. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 54 Click OK. for Type. click Cancel. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Cancel. 58 On the Edit toolbar. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level.49 In the Project Browser.

and press ENTER.60 Click. 61 Press ESC. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. enter 45. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 .

Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. 64 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows Off. 66 Optionally. under 3D Views. 65 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows On. double-click To Building.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). and copy it to the 05 Level. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Ref Plane. 3 On the Options Bar. and click to create a reference plane to the left. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. and click to create a reference plane to the right.rvt. click Training Files. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. under Floor Plans. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Move the cursor over grid line B. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 1500 mm. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. and for Offset.

You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. C. and 3. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 Select the left reference plane. 2. 7 Using the same method. shorten the right reference plane. click Modify.5 On the Design Bar. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. click Stairs. and specify a point to create first stair flight.

Move the cursor down. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . and select the 2nd reference plane. and specify a point.225mm Masonry. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. select Finish Face: Interior. 12 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. The complete stair displays. including its handrails. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. Click (Rectangle). Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. click Wall. beyond the end of the stair. select Basic Wall : Generic .

20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. for Prefer.15 On the Tools toolbar. and press ENTER. and click to select it. click Dimension. click Align. Select the interior face of the wall. Select the wall. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Lock the dimension. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. Click Modify. select the dimension value. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and specify a point away from the wall. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. select Wall faces. Select the bottom of the stair. 18 Using the same technique. enter 1200 mm. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and lock the alignment.

Because the dimension is constrained. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 27 In the Type Selector. The stair and walls move to the left. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. TIP To flip the door swing.21 Select the dimension. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. a warning displays. 25 While pressing CTRL. 24 On the Standard toolbar. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. (Undo). Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . and press DELETE. 28 On the Options Bar. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. clear Tag on Placement. and press DELETE. select both reference planes. 23 Select the stair. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. click Door.

click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). but if you view the top level of the building. 33 Select the stair. select 05 Roof Garden. and move the cursor to spin the building model. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Modify. click 36 On the View toolbar. Click OK. for Base Constraint. 35 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. select 00 Foundation. (Element Properties). 40 Zoom in to the stairs. select all 4 walls. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. Click OK. for Multistory Top Level. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. (Rectangle). You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected.30 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. (Default 3D View). click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Align. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. For Top Constraint. 44 On the Tools toolbar. Under Constraints.

click (Default 3D View). click see the roof.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. and click OK. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and lock the alignment. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. and lock the alignments. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . on the View toolbar.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under Floor Plans. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. double-click 01 Entry Level.55 In the Project Browser. click 59 On the View toolbar. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 56 Select the shaft. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. For Top Constraint. Under Constraints. enter 300 mm. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. and click OK. (SteeringWheels). ■ 58 On the View toolbar. for Base Offset. By offsetting the base. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. (Default 3D View).

double-click 05 Roof Garden. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . click Wall.rvt. under Graphics. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. 2 Right-click in the view. select 06 Roof.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. and click View Properties. for Underlay.

click Edit Profile. 11 In the Go To View dialog. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 15 In the error dialog. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Basic Wall : Generic . 17 On the Options Bar. click . 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. click Remove Constraints. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall.5 In the Type Selector. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. select Elevation: South. 7 On the Tools toolbar. and on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. enter 9750. and click Open View. and then select the right face of the wall. click (Align).225mm Masonry. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. and click (Fillet arc). The exact placement is not important.

and click (Circle). double-click {3D}. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. click Finish Sketch. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. click .18 In the upper right corner of the profile. under 3D Views. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest.

Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

4.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as shown. and press ESC twice. TIP After you place the 1st planter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. 3 In the Type Selector. click Component. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. 6 In the Type Selector. click Component. select M_RPC Tree . under Floor Plans. double-click 05 Roof Garden. between grid lines C and D. 5 On the Basics tab.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. click Training Files. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5.rvt. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter.5 Meters. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 .

double-click {3D}. 16 Click Apply. click Lines. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. under Floor Plans. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. for Height. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. (Element Properties). 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Project Browser.8 On the View toolbar. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Name dialog. enter Japanese Cherry 1. View the roof. and in the Type Selector. 21 On the Design Bar. enter 1500 mm.5 Meters. and then click OK twice. click Edit/New. click (Default 3D View). under Dimensions. and on the Options Bar. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. click Floor. enter 2400 mm. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). as shown. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. For Offset. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. for Type. 17 While pressing CTRL. 11 Select one of the trees. double-click 05 Roof Garden. select the 2 remaining trees. select M_RPC Tree . The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. click Duplicate.5 Meters. under 3D Views.

28 Select the right vertical floor line. for Offset. and click to place the line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to sketch a line. enter 0 mm. click (Draw). 26 On the Options Bar. and click to sketch a line. 25 Using the same method. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 29 On the Options Bar.

and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. click (Trim/Extend). move the cursor up 900 mm. clear Chain. and click to finish the line. 32 Press ESC. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and click to finish the line. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B.30 On the Options Bar. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 35 Select the line that you just drew.

38 On the Design Bar. click Component. 49 On the Options Bar. and click so he is facing the column. near Column E5. 42 In the Name dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. under Constraints. select Rotate after placement. for Type. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. enter Sidewalk. for Height Offset from Level. 48 In the Type Selector. as shown: (Element Properties). create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Duplicate. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. When you render an image. select M_RPC Male : Alex. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. a photorealistic image displays. In plan view. Next. 45 Click OK. 39 Select the sidewalk. click Edit/New. The completed sidewalk displays. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. enter -250 mm. 43 Click OK twice.

58 In the camera view (3D View 1). 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. 56 Press ESC twice. and click (Element Properties). about 30 degrees. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click the car. 52 In the Type Selector. click Camera. and place it along the sidewalk behind him.NOTE If necessary. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. select M_RPC Beetle. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 54 In the Type Selector. and click to place her on the sidewalk. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. select M_RPC Female : Cathy.

Next. double-click To Building. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. 66 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. 65 Click the sidewalk. 63 Click the sidewalk. When you select a host for a component. click Pick Host. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. 60 In the Project Browser.59 In the Element Properties dialog. click Pick Host. under Elevations. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. If the sidewalk changes height. under 3D Views. 64 Select Alex. for Offset. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. enter -300 mm. double-click West. under Constraints. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 .

After the service core is positioned. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and replace them with a service core. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142.

4 Press DELETE. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you delete the entire stairwell. 5 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. (SteeringWheels). double-click 05 Roof Garden. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. click (Default 3D View). Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. 3 Select the entire stairwell. walls. and shaft opening. click 6 On the View toolbar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . including the stairs. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden.

13 In the drawing area. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Training Files. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. 10 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. and notice that the linked file is listed.rvt. click Modify. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click OK. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. right-click m_RRB_core. click (Align). 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the linked instance. 14 In the Project Browser. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. and on the Design Bar. expand Model. expand Groups. under Floor Plans.

or if the group layout is expected to change. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. click 21 On the View toolbar. 18 Select the core. click Ungroup. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . and click to align the center. click (top down view). NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. 17 On the Design Bar. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. click Modify. (Default 3D View). and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. ■ ■ Click grid line C. 20 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). 19 On the Design Bar.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line.

you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. where it is hosted within a railing family. click Training Files. After you modify it. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add glass railings around the floor edges. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise.

This is the railing that you want to add to your model. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. double-click 02 Level. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.rvt. click Edit. and open Metric\m_Conference. 5 Expand Railing. click (Split). and double-click Lounge Perspective. and Parapet. The floor sketch displays. Handrail only. expand Renderings. 3 In the Conference project. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click to split the floor. press and hold CTRL. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. 8 In the Project Browser. and select Glass. in the Project Browser. The rendering displays. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . and expand Railings. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. and on the Options Bar. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. expand Families. click OK.rvt.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.

20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and click to draw another line. and click the lock to lock the alignment. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. click Modify. and click to draw another line. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and click to place it. 18 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Tools toolbar. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 25 Select grid line B. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. and on the Options Bar. verify that Chain is not selected. click Lines. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. click (Align).15 On the Design Bar. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B.

26 Select grid line D. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. For Offset. for Type. and lock the alignment. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . Lock the dimensions. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Railing Properties. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 33 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Railing.rvt project. select Glass. 30 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Tools toolbar. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. enter 100 mm. 31 In the Revit dialog. click (Align).

37 On the Design Bar. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Camera. 39 Click Finish Sketch.

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . You can view the railing that you just added.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. exterior fire stairs. slight modifications to the building design have been made. balconies. and a roof garden. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. NOTE For training purposes. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. lofty ceilings. 153 . the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. We wish to thank BNIM Architects.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces.

154 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. 155 . including plan. section. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. You learn how to create new views from existing views. how to create section and elevation views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. elevation. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. you learn how to create views from a building model.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. click Training Files. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. and click OK. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser.2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 In the Project Browser. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. select Level 2. under Floor Plans.

click the current scale. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. Next. and click OK. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. enter Vicinity Plan.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Vicinity Plan. 11 Under Floor Plans. and click 1: 1000. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 14 On the View Control Bar. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . 16 Right-click. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.rvt. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

under Floor Plans. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. select Elevation: Building Elevation. double-click Level 1. select 1:100.rvt. click Elevation.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 4 On the Options Bar.

7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

under Views (all).Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. click Section. enter South East. ■ Move the cursor down. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and double-click Level 1. and click OK. select Section: Building Section. expand Floor Plans. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. select 1:100. under Elevations (Building Elevation). for Scale. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. under Elevations. 10 In the Rename View dialog. double-click South East. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

Click the midpoint of the section line. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Split Segment. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it.

21 On the Design Bar. using the blue circular drag grip. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. expand Sections (Building Section). 23 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . click Modify. and double-click Section 1.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. To create each view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.25 On the Design Bar.

Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:50.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Creating Callout Views | 167 . 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. click Callout. double-click Level 1. select Floor Plan. under Floor Plans. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. for Scale.Resulting callout view . 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.

168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and select the callout boundary. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. ■ Select the middle grip.

click Modify. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. Creating Callout Views | 169 . 14 On the Options Bar. click Callout. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. for Scale. under Sections (Building Sections). double-click Section 1.7 On the Design Bar. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select 1:50. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. select Detail View: Detail.

■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.

and click OK. Creating Callout Views | 171 . and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Detail Views (Details). Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. enter Roof Overhang Detail. 18 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. expand Detail Views (Details).17 In the Project Browser.

172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. double-click Level 1. the elevation markers. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and click Open. click Training Files.rvt. open Metric\Families\Annotations. select Custom-Section Head. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. You change the appearance of the section mark head. under Floor Plans. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open.

for Section Head. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. enter 12. Section Tail – Filled. and click OK twice. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . enter Section Head – Custom. and click OK. On the floor plan. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 10 On the floor plan. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and can be applied to the section line. click the Annotation Objects tab. 17 Under Category. select Section Head .Filled. select the section line. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. select the current project.Custom.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. click Edit/New. . click Load into Project. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Section Tail . scroll to Section Line. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 15 Under Category. scroll to Section Marks. 19 Click OK. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. clear any others. click Duplicate. and select 2. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and select 3. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project.5mm Square. 22 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 12 For Section Tag. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.

23 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. enter 12. select the callout. .5 mm. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. click Edit/New. and click Open. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 6 mm. For Corner Radius. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. and click OK. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 30 On the Design Bar. select Custom-Callout Head. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. For Line Weight. 27 Click OK twice. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. open Metric\Families\Annotations. On the floor plan. click Training Files. and click OK. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. . for Callout Tag. select 3. clear all others. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. select 12. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 39 Click OK twice.5mm Square. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Dimensions ➤ Width. click Edit/New. notice the square elevation markers that display. 34 In the Name dialog. Click OK. Click OK. select the current project. and on the Options Bar. for Elevation Tag. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 40 Press ESC. select Square. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. click Load into Project. and on the Options Bar. 36 In the drawing. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog.

and select 7. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. and visual overrides. and select 4. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. view regions. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. You learn to create view templates. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 45 For Line Pattern. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. filters. select Dash. masking regions. 49 Click OK. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 46 Under Category. 43 Under Category. scroll down to Callout Boundary. click the Annotation Objects tab. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. expand Callout Boundary.

click Training Files. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. The crop region displays as red. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. under Elevations. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. 5 On the View Control Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom to Fit. To accomplish this. 6 On the View Toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click (Hide Crop Region).Creating a View Template In this exercise. click (Show Crop Region). you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and apply it to multiple elevation views. and double-click East. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. levels. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. elevation markers. clear Entourage. 13 On the View Control bar. 11 Under Visibility. under Visibility.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. Creating a View Template | 177 . 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. grids. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and section lines are now hidden in the view. Callouts. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

20 Using the same method. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click OK. double-click North. under Elevations. right-click North.rvt. and click OK. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click Create View Template From View. 17 In the Project Browser. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. edit the crop region as before. 15 In the New View Template dialog. right-click East. click Apply. and click Apply View Template.14 In the Project Browser. 16 In the View Templates dialog.

right-click. for View Range. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click Penthouse. for Level. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. select Level Below (Level 4). under Extents. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level Below (Level 4). and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Properties. for Bottom. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. Click OK twice. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. under Floor Plans. click Edit. Under View Depth. select Penthouse.

select Level 4. double-click Roof Plan.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. right-click. select Roof Plan. under Extents. under Floor Plans. for Level. Under View Depth. click Edit. select Level 4. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for View Range. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. for Bottom. Click OK twice.

click Edit. 16 On the Design Bar.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for View Range. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. under Extents. select Unlimited. for Bottom. click Lines. In the left corner of the building. select Unlimited. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 10 On the Design Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. Move you cursor diagonally. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. Click OK twice. click Plan Region. 11 On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . 13 On the Design Bar. for Level.

3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Filters tab. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. in this case. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. and double-click Level 1.rvt.17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. After you apply the filter. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. expand Floor Plans. the fire rating of the walls. 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.

apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. click OK. for Color. under Basic colors. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Edit/New. under Categories. 16 Click OK. click Remove. 14 In the Color dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and apply a color. 17 Using the same method. and click OK. and click OK. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 11 Select Rated Walls. select Fire Rating. select the red color. click Add. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. Select contains. under Projection/Surface. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. and click OK. enter Rated Walls. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Walls. click Override under Patterns. and click OK. under Filters. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 10 On the Filter tab. 12 On the Filter tab. click (New). 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click <No Override>. 5 In the Filters dialog. for Rated Walls. Enter Hr. 7 In the Filters dialog. for Pattern. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 9 Click OK. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . select Solid Fill.

Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. To accomplish this.

11 In the Type Selector. 9 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. right-click. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 5 On the View menu. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. as shown. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. select Invisible lines. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Show Crop Region. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 8 Select the crop region. 7 On the View menu. and click Rename. click Masking Region. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser.

click (Rectangle). 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish Sketch. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .12 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. and click 1: 50. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. for Pattern. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . 7 Under Cut. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. under Pattern Overrides. 4 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click <No Override> to apply a color.rvt. right-click Unit 18 Plan . click black. 11 Click OK twice. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. click the current scale. under Visibility.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. click in the Patterns field. for Color. right-click.Level 1. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and click Override. and click OK. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Solid fill. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Rename. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. select Walls. right-click. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. under Floor Plans. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.

click Modify. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. clear Floors. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 Under Visibility. under Visibility. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear Grids. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .

Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. for Pattern. and click OK. select the sofa. 23 In the Color dialog. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. under Lines. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click a purple color. click Projection Lines. select Dash. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.20 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. click <No Override> to apply a color. for Color. 21 Under Projection/Surface. right-click. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. click Override. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 25 Click OK twice. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. By using the previous method to make the selection.

click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.28 For Color. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . and click OK twice. 32 Select one of the lamps. click By Category Override. right-click. select a bright green color. click . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 29 In the Color dialog.

192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click . you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project.33 On the View Control Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. how to add views to the sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . and click View. click Sheet.rvt. right-click. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. select A0 metric. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. click Training Files. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.Creating Sheets. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.

enter Site Plan. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. Click OK. For Sheet Name. expand Sheets (all).Unnamed. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . For Sheet Number. click Modify. click Modify. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). 5 When the title block highlights. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. enter A101. and select the title block.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Design Bar.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 2009. for Project Address.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. under Other. For Project Status. For Client Name. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter 2009-1. 14 Click OK. enter J. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Name. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter For Approval. For Project Number. Smith. enter 15 May. MA 12345 12 Click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. click Edit.

16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. and click OK. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Elevations A105 . for Name. enter Floor Plan. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.Elevations A106 . select the new sheet name. you add views to these sheets.Elevations A107 . select A0 metric. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Save. and click Rename. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Layout Plan A104 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser.rvt.Stairs In the following exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Sections A108 . and click OK. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.

and click to place the view. double-click A102 . 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet.Floor Plan. double-click A104 . and drag it to the sheet.Elevations. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all). 4 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation).Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. The red border around the view no longer displays. under Sheets (all). and click to place it. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. select Level 1. click Modify.rvt. 2 In the Project Browser.

and click to place it.Sections. double-click A107 . and click to place it. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Modify. under Sheets (all). 8 On the Design Bar. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). align it with the East elevation. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet.

15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. for View Scale. and on the Options Bar.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. select 1:5. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . and click OK. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. 16 Select title bar. zoom in to the grip. and press TAB until it highlights. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. move the cursor over it. .

Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. double-click Level 1. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. under Sheets (all). View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click to place it. 18 Under Floor Plans. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar.Stairs. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click A108 .

3 At the right end of the Roof level line. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you must first activate the view on the sheet. and click Activate View. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Sections. right-click. enter 16700 mm. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . click Modify. under Sheets (all). 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. In order to do this. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.rvt. and press ENTER. and then make changes and deactivate the view. 5 On the Design Bar. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. double-click A107 . 2 Select the building section view.

you create a title sheet for your drawing set. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. You modify the view to hide the view title. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click North. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. and click Deactivate View. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.rvt. After you create the sheet. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .6 Right-click. 7 In the Project Browser.

and click Properties. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter T. double-click Level 1. click Camera. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. select the new sheet name. right-click. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. The camera view displays. select A0 metric. Click OK. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Title Sheet. under Floor Plans.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 7 Place the camera as shown.

10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. 12 On the View Control Bar. for Eye Elevation. Click OK. Under Camera. under Sheets (all). double-click T . 11 On the View Control Bar. 14 Under 3D Views. enter 1500 mm. 13 In the Project Browser. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. Under Extents. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter 100000 mm.Title Sheet. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. For Target Elevation. select Far Clip Active. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .8 On the Options Bar. enter 18000 mm. For Far Clip Offset.

enter 635 mm. 19 Select the view on the sheet. enter Viewport/no title mark. . under Graphics. and then click OK. select No. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . Click Apply. click Duplicate. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. click Size. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 24 Click OK twice. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog.15 With the view selected. click Modify. and click OK. 22 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. on the Options Bar. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. select Scale (locked proportions). 25 On the Design Bar. Under Model Crop Size. click Modify. for Height. and on the Options Bar. for Show title.

and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

such as doors and windows. Because of the open style floor plan. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Objects In this lesson.rvt. expand Floor Plans.Level 1. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. such as room and window schedules. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. You also learn to create different types of schedules. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. 207 .

create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Room and Area. move the cursor to the right. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. click Room Separation. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 5 Using the same method. right-click in the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan.

Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 7 On the Design Bar. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 .6 Using the same method. click Load. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Modify.

click it. indicating that it can be edited. and press ENTER. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 13 On the Options Bar. type 2400 mm. and select the room tag. 16 On the Design Bar. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 14 For Offset. click Room. The room tag number displays in blue. click Training Files. click OK. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click Modify. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and the rectangle contains the room tag. and click to place the room and tag.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. type U18-1. 11 In the Tags dialog. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag.rfa.

and press ENTER. 22 Click the room text label. click Modify. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. click Modify. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 23 Using the same method. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . place rooms and tags. Dining. Click to place the new room and tag.18 Click the room text label. Sequential letters are also supported. type Kitchen. 19 On the Design Bar. type Entry. click Room. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. and press ENTER.

click Modify. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. on the Model Categories tab. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . but they need to be tagged.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Level 2. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. click Room Tag. The rooms are already placed. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 27 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Floor Plans. 29 On the Design Bar. and moving clockwise. clear Room Separation. and click OK. expand Lines.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. in the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 .rvt. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you learn how to place door and window tags.Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. clear Leader.rvt. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

add 5 more rooms. For 104. type Storage. The room Number is U17-46. For 102. 10 Edit the number to be 101. click New. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. next to Rows. select Storage. select Corridor. type Building Entry. for room 101. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 11 Using the same method. For 103. For 105. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. and press ENTER. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. 101-106. and press ENTER. for Name. type Corridor.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and modify room names. click the Color field. and press ENTER. 4 Click OK twice. place rooms from a program list. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 13 Save the file. In the Line Graphics dialog. For Room Separation. you add room separation lines. under Projection/Surface. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. In the Lines field. under Floor Plans. click the bright green swatch. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. click the Lines field. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .■ For 106. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. type Stair. click Override. expand Lines. select 9. under Visibility. double-click Level 1. For Weight. Under Custom colors. and click OK.rvt.

Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. First. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click Modify. draw the horizontal line. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . click Room. 9 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room Separation.

13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. type 2400 mm. select 101 Building Entry. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right).Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 102 Storage. 14 For Offset. for Room.

15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 16 Using the same method. double-click Room Schedule. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 19 In the Project Browser. place the following rooms. click Modify. 20 While pressing CTRL. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 17 On the Design Bar. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). and zoom in to the Corridor. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas).

Floor Finish. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. for Rows. click 23 On the Design Bar. and for all 3 finishes. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 24 Open the Room Schedule. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. 31 For Key Name. type Units. under Available fields. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. and Wall Finish. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. click New. 30 On the Options Bar. (Element Properties). click Modify. select Base Finish. type As Selected. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar.21 On the Options Bar. under Category. and click Add. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. select Rooms. while pressing CTRL. clear Room Bounding. 27 Select Schedule keys. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. under Constraints.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . for Fields. click Edit. and click Add. select Units. and click OK. double-click Level 1. right-click Room Schedule. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. select Units. 36 Click OK twice. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 Open the Room Schedule. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 44 On the Options Bar. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. click Check None. under Floor Plans. click (Element Properties). 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 43 In the Filter dialog. select Rooms.32 Using the same method. under Schedules/Quantities. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. for Available fields. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Properties. under Identity Data. select Room Style. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser. for Room Style. under Other. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. for Room Style. 42 On the Options Bar. 38 Under U17-8.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. select Public. click OK. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. type Room Type. 48 Save the file. under Graphics. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. at the warning prompt. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. select Room Style. and click Properties. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Service. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.rvt. 104. type Room Type. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click the Color Scheme field. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. for Name.46 Open the Room Schedule. For rooms 102 and 105. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. for Color. click OK. 103. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. (Duplicate). right-click Level 1. and click OK. and 106. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. under Views (all). click 5 For Title. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Floor Plans.

12 In the Element Properties dialog. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. click the value in the Color column. select Room Type. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. under Schemes. click Edit Color Scheme.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 19 On the Options Bar. clear Visible. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). under Visibility. expand Lines. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Edit. click Color Scheme Legend. click Modify. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . 14 Click OK twice. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. select the color legend. and clear Room Separation. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

(Element Properties). under Custom color. 23 Using the same method. 29 Click OK twice. click Modify. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 24 Click OK. for Swatch Width. on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. select blue.22 In the Color dialog. and click OK. 28 Under Title Text. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 30 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. type 5 mm. respectively. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Size. type 25 mm.

click Color Scheme Legend. and click OK. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. right-click Building Section. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. under Visibility. double-click Building Section. select Rooms. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. 35 Click OK twice. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. click Edit. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Room Type. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. under Graphics. under Sections. under Sections. and select Properties. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . for Color Scheme. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

and click OK. (Filter Selection). 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click . select Rooms. 41 On the Options Bar. select Units. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. 45 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. select Public. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 46 Click . select all the rooms in the stairwell. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. click Check None. and click OK. 42 In the Filter dialog. under Identity Data.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. under Identity Data.

excluding the stairwell spaces. 54 While pressing CTRL. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. select Service. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. for Rows. for Room Style. under Schedules/Quantities. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. click New. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . and click OK.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. type Suites. and click . select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. under Key Name for the new row. 51 On the Options Bar. double-click Room Style Schedule.

and click OK. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. for Room Style. select the room on the left side of the top floor. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. under Identity Data. The color fill extends to the roof. and click OK. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 59 Under Room Area Computation. under Volume Computations. verify that At wall finish is selected. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. select Areas and Volumes. The color fill will extend to the roof. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor.55 Click . select Suites. but not beyond it.

click Modify. under Constraints. type -254 mm.0. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 70 For Limit Offset. 72 On the Design Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . . 64 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 2. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 68 Click . for Upper Limit. the dining room. under Constraints. for Upper Limit. 66 Click OK. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 67 On the first level. 71 Click OK. select the stairwell room.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. and the living room. type 0. select Loft.

Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.73 Save the file. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. under 3D Views. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. double-click {3D}.

under Category. 5 On the Design Bar. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist .Insulation on Plywood Deck . 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Family and Type. under Available fields. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.EPDM. Select Grand totals. 9 Using the same method.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. select Roofs. 4 In the Type Selector. Clear Itemize every instance. For Then by. and click Add. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. and click OK. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . click Family and Type. 3 While pressing CTRL. select Material: Description. click Modify.

Under Field formatting. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. under Available fields. for Fields. click the Formatting tab. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Currency. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. and under Fields. type Estimated Cost.40 50. 21 Click OK. select Material: Area. 12 Click OK. 17 Click Calculated Value. select Material: Cost. for Name. click Estimated Cost. 23 For Field formatting. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). and click Add. 20 For Formula. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click Properties. 19 For Type. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. select Calculate totals.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Material: Cost. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. under Other. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. click Edit. and click OK twice. select Calculate totals.

35 The Estimated cost is calculated. You draw a travel path line. and reporting the shared parameters. ensuring consistency across families and projects. you create a shared parameter file. tag the line. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. The cost fields are formatted correctly. select $. 27 In the Format dialog. for Rounding. for Currency. Digit grouping. In this lesson. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. and are defined and stored in an external file. and schedule the total distance of each path. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . which inserts commas after every three digits. you create an exiting plan for the building. either within family components or within the project template. 30 Click OK twice. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. 31 Save the file. regardless of category. not just for currency. 29 Select Use digit grouping. These shared parameters can be added to any family. 26 In the Project Units dialog. creating a generic tag to tag the family. can be used for any number-based parameter. 28 For Unit symbol. adding the shared parameters to a family. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. click the Format value.

type Travel Distance.txt. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.rvt. click Create. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Save. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. click Training Files. under Floor Plans.rvt. click New. and click OK. click New. for Type of Parameter. 11 Click OK twice. click Training Files. click New. 7 Under Parameters. for Name. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for File name. for Name. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 9 Under Parameters. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. type Path ID. type Exiting. select Length. under Groups. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

rvt. click Load into Projects.rfa. under Dimensions. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. under Parameter Data. for Group parameter under. 10 Using the same method. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click Add. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. group it under Dimensions. and select Instance. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. click Family Types. otherwise the family loads into the current project. select Constraints. 8 Select Instance. select Shared parameter. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. for Travel Distance Formula. If you have multiple projects open. under Parameter Type. Click Training Files. click Add. type Length. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. 13 Click Apply. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.rvt.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 12 In the Family Types dialog. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and click Select. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. 11 Click OK. and click OK. following the equals symbol (=). 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. under Parameters. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . and click OK. 15 If necessary. in the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. 14 On the Design Bar.

click Select. click parameter(s) to label). click (Add Parameter). 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 In the Edit Label dialog. and click OK. click Label.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. 19 On the Design Bar. 24 Click OK twice. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. under Parameters. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Training Files. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. select Travel Distance. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Category Parameters. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. click Label.rft. select Travel Distance. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes.

32 In the Save As dialog. 29 In the drawing window. and click OK. 33 On the Design Bar. select Path ID. and move it down. click Modify. for File Name.28 On the Design Bar.rvt is selected. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. type M_Travel Distance Tag.rfa. click Load into Projects. 35 Save the file. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. and click Save. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. and press DELETE. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 .

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. After the lines are tagged. 6 Move the cursor to the right. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. above the exterior door as shown. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. and click in the center of the corridor. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. double-click Exiting Plan .Level 1.Tagging. click Component. select Chain. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.Placing.

and click outside of the building. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 8 On the Design Bar. double click Exiting Plan . click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category. 11 Select each of the travel path lines.7 Move the cursor down. type 1-1. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 While pressing CTRL. through the door. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. and click (Element Properties). Placing. under Constraints. 12 On the Design Bar. move the cursor near the right corner.Level 2. and click OK.Tagging. click Component. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. select the 2 dashed travel lines. for Path ID. verify that Chain is selected. under Floor Plans. clear Leader. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 10 On the Options Bar.

move the cursor to the left. click Modify. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click in the stair. 23 Move the cursor down. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. and click above the door to the stair. click Component. 21 On the Design Bar. and click. 20 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor up through the door.

under Category. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 30 Using the same method. type Level 1 Exit Distance. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. Placing. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. click Modify. 33 For Name. . click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK. 28 While pressing CTRL. 26 Select each of the travel path lines.Tagging. for Path ID. type 2-1. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.24 On the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 .

41 Under Fields.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Path ID. select contains. click Edit. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 38 For Sort by. select Path ID and Travel Distance. under Available fields. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. select Travel Distance. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 36 For Filter by. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. in the third field. and click Add. and in the third field. under Schedules/Quantities. 50 Save the file. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and click Properties. under Other. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 46 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. type Level 2 Exit Distance. type 1-. for Filter by. select Calculate totals. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. In the left pane of the Open dialog. type 2-. for Filter. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. while pressing CTRL. select Path ID. 35 Click the Filter tab. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. and click OK. 45 In the Rename View dialog. in the first field. 44 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and under Field formatting. 43 In the Project Browser. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. 49 Click OK twice. in the second field.

under Identity Data. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.Interiors ➤ C10 . 4 Under Available fields.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . and click OK. right-click Generic . select the following fields. and click View. 10 In the schedule. 9 Click OK twice. for Assembly Code. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. and select C1010145 . click the Fields tab.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Categories. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Partitions . select Walls. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. expand C . and click . and click Properties. right-click the Design Bar.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Fixed Partitions. click the Value field. click Schedule/Quantities.152 mm.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. for Database Name. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 6 Click Finish.rvt.mdb.11 Close the exercise file. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 11 Click OK 3 times.mdb). type Revit_Project. 8 In the New Database dialog. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. select a location for the database file. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 3 Click New. click Training Files. the database display may be different than that shown. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. click the File Data Source tab. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 9 Under Directories. and click Next. click Create. click OK. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. under Database. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Next. 1 On the File menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK to create the database. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.

tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. Additionally. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. 13 Close the exercise file. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. in addition to the Id column. For example. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code.

262 .

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. 263 . or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you trace over the building model geometry.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. 297 . and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. like a standard door header condition. In order to detail from the building model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. In the callout view. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. and metal studs. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. plywood. add detail components. These components display at the required scale. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail.

They are also view specific. and click Open. and click OK. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. as well as detail lines. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. click Detail Component. click Training Files. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. region objects.rfa. select As underlay. which means that all detail components. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Training Files. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. After you add components. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . You load detail components. you detail the view of the roof edge. 5 In the alert dialog. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. The roof overhang detail displays. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. double-click the detail callout head. 7 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. and insulation objects.rvt. Exact location is not important. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects.Detailing the View In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

10 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. for Pattern ➤ Detail.8 Delete the component. select Corrugated Metal. 17 In the drawing area. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 13 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 15 For Spacing.5mm. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 16 Click OK twice. 19 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Modify. click Repeating Detail. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 406. Detailing the View | 299 .

23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Open. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . ■ ■ Click Modify. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 22 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. and on the Edit toolbar. click (Move). click Detail Component.rfa. 24 In the Type Selector. click Load. click Training Files. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.

click OK. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click Training Files. and click Open. 30 In the Type Selector. Detailing the View | 301 . 33 In the Type Selector. and place it in the detail view as shown. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 31 To properly orient the component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal.Because you still have several components to load. 29 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog.rvt. you load them as a group from a single file. press SPACEBAR 3 times. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Detail Component.

302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Chain. 35 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 37 Click Modify. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. click the Flip instance arrows. 38 Select the horizontal segment. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.

click Detail Component. ■ Click Modify. as shown. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. select to near side. For Offset. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. enter 140mm. click (Move). Detailing the View | 303 . 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. click Insulation. 42 Click Modify. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation.

meaning they display only in this view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 2 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 47 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. and lock the component.rvt. they are view specific. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown.45 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 51 Click Modify. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. as shown. Like detail components. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Lines. you add lines to your detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Detail Lines on page 304.

select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. enter 10mm.4 Click Modify. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. For Offset. click Detail Lines. as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 5 Select the vertical plywood component. For Offset. 10 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . select Medium Lines. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. as shown.

click (Draw). 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. select Chain. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and draw the detail lines as shown. and clear Chain.

For Offset. and click OK. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser.18 In the Type Selector. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. right-click. and click Properties. and press ENTER. select the Penthouse level line. 24 On the View Control Bar. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. click Detail Lines. draw the detail lines as shown. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. select Thin Lines. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. enter 10mm. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . select Do not display. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. Click (Pick Lines). select Vapor Barrier. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 26 In the Type Selector. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. When you turn the display model off.

33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 32 Click Modify. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 34 Proceed to the next exercise.29 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. select M_Break Line. click Detail Component. 30 In the Type Selector. Adding Text Notes on page 308. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. you add text notes to complete the detail. press SPACEBAR as necessary.

rvt.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click again to specify the location of the text box. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes | 309 . and click to place the dimension. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 6 Click Modify. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. Enter the text.

under Text Fields. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. on the Options Bar. for Suffix. and save the exercise file. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. and click Rename. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. right-click. and click OK. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. right-click. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. (Filter Selection). enter Roof Overhang Detail .Keynotes. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).rvt. and click OK.7 Select the dimension line. Creating Detail Components on page 310. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. select a text note. and press DELETE. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. click 6 In the Filter dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. click Select All Instances. enter Typ.. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. click Roof Overhang Detail. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. and click OK. and click the dimension text.

10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping.7 Click Modify. 16 Click Modify. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. and click Open. pressing TAB. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog.rft. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 15 Use a window to select all linework. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. click Training Files. and selecting the chain. in the Type Selector. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. select all the coping linework. while pressing CTRL. select Medium Lines. 14 Click Modify. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

you place keynotes on objects. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. click Training Files. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click it in the Project Browser. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 30 In the drawing area. and click Save. 23 Using a window. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. and the component can be placed in the detail. click Detail Component. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click . click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . While pressing SHIFT. select the coping. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. click Load into Projects. 22 Click Modify.Keynotes view is not the open view. click Detail Component. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter Roof Edge.rfa. 31 Using the same method used previously. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail.18 In the Save As dialog. navigate to your preferred location. The original linework remains selected. 21 To place the component. Adding Keynotes on page 312. 25 In the Filter dialog. 28 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 Press DELETE. for File name. clear Detail Items. and click Open. 27 On the Design Bar. delete the underlying linework. click Load.

Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. In the Keynotes dialog. and click Open. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.C1. Click to place the leader arm. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Roof Edge4. click Training Files. click Edit/New.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 19mm Plywood. use keynote 06160. Adding Keynotes | 313 . use keynote 07645.rvt. 2 In the alert dialog.D11. 63mm Rigid Insulation. For the metal coping. and click OK.B5. click Keynote ➤ Element. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. select the metal fascia with drip edge. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. (Element Properties). navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. 6 Click Modify.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. click in the Value column. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. 18 Save the file.D11. click Detail Component. FasciaProfile_1. select Corrugated Metal. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. use keynote 09250. 11 Click OK 3 times. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. use keynote 06110. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. For the 50 x 200. and click . Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. For the 50 x 150.9 In the Type Properties dialog. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.20 Ga. navigate to 07645.D1. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. use keynote 06110. You do this in order to keynote the component.A8.F1. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 17 Keynote the component. For the 50 x 300. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. using keynote 07460. 12 On the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Element. 22mm Corrugated Steel .G1. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.I1. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. use keynote 06160. For the 19mm Plywood Siding.F1. 15 In the Type Selector. use keynote 06110.

3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Name dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 22 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. and click Save. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. 24 While pressing CTRL. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. click Detail Component.rvt. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. click Training Files. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 6 Lock the line. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 11 Press DELETE. click Lines. 16 Select the component. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select the left end point of the reference line. select Medium Lines. click Training Files. 5 In the drawing area. select Medium Line Detail Component. and click Open. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click (Element Properties). and select the right end point.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 20 Click OK 3 times. and click Modify. 15 Click Modify. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar.rft. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. click Duplicate. and click Open. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. for File name. click Edit/New. navigate to your preferred location. click Load. click Load into Projects.

name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 27 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 28 In the Type Selector. 40 Click Modify.A1.A5. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 44 On the Design Bar. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 37 Click OK 3 times. click Detail Component. and hidden) used in the view. against the 19mm plywood. 34 In the Name dialog. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 31 Select the component. and click . and assign it keynote 06110. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click in the Value column. and assign it keynote 07260. 29 In the drawing area. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click (Move). 42 Using the same method used previously. and click . click Edit/New.G1. click Detail Component. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 46 Click Modify.25 Next. 47 Select the component. name the component Air Barrier. on the Edit toolbar. 48 Using the same method used previously. 38 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 Click Modify. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. You add the components to the project and keynote them. and click . 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click . and click the lower end at the break line. 41 Select the component just added. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. select m_Light Line Detail Component. invisible. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. enter EPDM Membrane. click Detail Component. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 49 With the component selected.

and click . leaving the detail component lines. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. click Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 52 In the Type Selector. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. select Chain. 55 Click Modify. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 53 On the Options Bar.

318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 68 In the drawing area. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 50 x 200 Framing. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. in the Type Selector. and Vapor Barrier.rfa. 60 On the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Element. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 63 In the drawing area. Air Barrier. select Invisible Lines. 61 In the drawing area. and assign it keynote 07260. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select the component. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component.A4. click Load into Projects.58 Using the method used previously.rfa. name the component Vapor Barrier. click Detail Component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 67 In the Type Selector.

A9. and close the text editor. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. 70 Using the method used previously. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. and press TAB. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting.A4. Enter 07463. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 ..txt. under Keynote Table. 72 Save the file. 3 In the text editor. add a keynote for the component. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. click Browse. and click . and assign it keynote 07210. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. Enter 07460. name the component Batt Insul.A1. The database file opens in a text editor. and press ENTER. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. click File menu ➤ Save. and press TAB.69 Select the component. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.rvt. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 71 In the drawing area. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

In the Type Selector. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). and click to place the note. 11 Click Modify. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. under Path Type. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. 9 In the drawing area. select Absolute. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet.A1. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. After you create a drafting view.txt. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. and click OK. click to place the leader. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 13 Click Modify. 14 Save the file. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. and click Open. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. click Keynote ➤ Element. and click OK. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. select all the keynotes. These details do not update with changes to the building model. you learn how to create a drafted detail.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. navigate to 07463. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes.

click Training Files. enter EPDM Metal Coping. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The detail that you import is in DWG format. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 7 In the Rename View dialog.dwg.Center to Center is selected. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. for Scale. and click OK. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. select Black and White. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. right-click Drafting 1. verify that Auto .Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.rvt.rvt. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Click Open. For Positioning. and click OK. For Colors. and click Rename. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. select 1 : 5. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.

12 Click OK twice. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. 10 In the Rename dialog. and click Properties. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. click Callout. delete the existing value. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 11 In the Type Properties dialog.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. enter Detail . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).No Reference. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 Click Modify. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. for New. click Rename. 6 Select the callout. select Reference other view. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.

so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. The callout is updated with the sheet information. click Modify. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.Elev. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 18 Save the file./Sect. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. and double-click the callout. double-click A105 . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 .No Reference). There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail ./Det.

Board. and click OK.rvt. click Edit/New. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. click Region Properties. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 11 In the Name dialog. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. select Gypsum-Plaster. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. for Name. 5 In the Type Selector. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Gyp. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click Filled Region. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Detail Component. for Name. 3 On the View Control Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. . Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. enter Header @ Sliding Door. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 14 Click OK 3 times. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Duplicate.

17 Click Modify. and enter 20. 20 On the Design Bar. click (Draw). click Finish Sketch. and on the Edit toolbar. select Wide Lines.5mm. click . (Mirror). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 22 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. Draw a rectangle as shown.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select the width dimension. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 18 While pressing CTRL. 16 Select the left edge of the region. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point.

29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Filled Region. and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. for Name. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. click Region Properties.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. 30 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 25 Click Modify. enter Wood . Move the cursor up. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New.Finish. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . . 24 Select the mirrored region. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 Click OK 3 times.Finish. and click above the top of the region as the end point. select Wood .

Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. verify that the thickness is 19mm. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 37 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. and select the right edge of the wood region. click . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 39 In the Type Selector. click Filled Region. Draw a rectangle as shown. 38 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle).34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar.5mm. click (Align). sketch the new region as shown.

You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click Ref Plane. For Offset. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. click 48 Click Modify. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).42 On the Design Bar. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. 47 Click the reference plane. (Align). enter 10mm. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 6mm. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Filled Region. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 46 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch.

and click to select the point. 56 On the Design Bar. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. enter 0. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . and select the bottom horizontal line. and click to select the point. and click to select the point. Select Chain. Move the cursor down 305mm. and press ENTER.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Move the cursor right 25mm. click Finish Sketch. click (Trim/Extend). Move the cursor left 25mm. For Offset.

and click Open. click Detail Component. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. click Load. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 58 In the Type Selector. 68 Click Modify. For Offset. select the height dimension. top. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. and right edges of the door panel region. 69 Select the bolt. and press ENTER. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 60 Select the left. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar.rfa. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter 76. select Medium Lines. 62 Select the left detail line.2mm. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. enter 3mm. 61 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. 65 On the Options Bar. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. and press ENTER.

73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. use the images as a guide. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. click Detail Component. and click Open. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . select Wide Lines. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.70 On the Design Bar. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 76 In the Type Selector. click Load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 74 Select the expansion bolt. click Training Files. 71 On the Options Bar. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar.rfa. click Detail Lines.

and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. 80 On the Options Bar. click . click . 84 On the Design Bar. 85 On the Options Bar. (Mirror). 87 Click Modify. 82 Select the rectangle. 79 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing .78 On the Design Bar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.

click Detail Lines.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 92 Select the line. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 90 In the Type Selector. as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . click (Mirror). select Medium Lines. 89 On the Design Bar.

and press ENTER. 97 On the Options Bar. 101 On the Design Bar. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. click Detail Component. select the length dimension. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 99 Click Modify. 103 Add two break lines as shown. select M_Break Line. 95 On the Design Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. 102 In the Type Selector.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. enter 3mm. click . TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. click Detail Lines.

105 In the drawing area. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 110 Select the dimension line. 108 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. and click Modify. 106 Click to place the dimension. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. using the Drag Text grip. click Dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region.5mm Arial.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 107 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. drag the text for the smaller dimension. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 .

under Dimension Value. and then click the dimension text. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. click Dimension. and click the dimension text. 113 Under Text Fields. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. enter See Schedule. and enter Varies. 118 Select Modify to end the command.5mmArial. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. select Replace With Text. 114 Click OK. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar.2. select Replace With Text. under Dimension Value.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. for Below. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

121 Click OK. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. and on the Options Bar. click to create an arced leader. select the gypsum board region on the left. 123 Click OK. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 125 In the Options Bar. 126 In the drawing area. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. and click Modify. click (Add Right Arc Leader). Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 127 Enter Gyp. click Text. and click to place the text. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Board. 128 Select the note.

132 Save the file. click Modify to end the command.131 On the Design Bar. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

and double-click East. 339 .Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text.rvt. Creating a Note Block In this exercise.

4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar.Hexagon. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 8 Select the keynote. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Symbol.rfa. type 1. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote .2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 7 On the Design Bar. for Number of Leaders.

Creating a Note Block | 341 . click (Element Properties). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click above the tag to place the copy. type Seal existing doors and insulate. 13 Select the tag. and click OK. under Identity Data. on the Options Bar. for Text.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. 12 On the Edit toolbar. click (Copy).

18 Using the same method. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. type Repair existing door surround. on the Edit toolbar. 17 Click OK.14 With the copy selected. click Copy. 15 For Text. type B. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. on the Options Bar. and click. click (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. 16 For Tag. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. (Mirror). 19 With the tag selected. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . click Modify. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. and moving counter-clockwise.21 On the Design Bar. 22 Optionally. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. Repair as required. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. using the table as a reference. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Remove all existing windows. Repair existing door surround.

and double-click A103 . The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. expand Sheets (all).Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. and drag it to the sheet. and click OK. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Tag. select Exterior Construction Notes. and click Add. and select Bold. for Sort by. for Header text. for Heading. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. type Description. type 6 mm. type Mark. under Available fields. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 29 In the Project Browser. On the Formatting tab. Select Text. select Center. format. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Clean cut and repair wall as required. and for Alignment. verify that Arial is selected. for Note block name. 27 In the column header (text). for the value. select Tag. 28 In the Project Browser. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 26 Click OK. and click Add.Elevations. On the Appearance tab. Create. type Exterior Construction Notes.

32 Zoom in to see the note block. under Sheets (all).rvt.Title Sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. click Modify. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. double-click T .31 On the Design Bar. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.

3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and drag it to the sheet. in the first field. and in the third field. select Sheet Number. for Filter by. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. select does not equal. select Sheet Number. expand Schedules/Quantities. 7 In the Project Browser. Select Sheet Name. The drawing list displays. 5 In the list title field. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . ■ 4 Click OK. in the second field. 6 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. double-click T . On the Filter tab. select Sheet Index. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Available fields. select Sheet Number. and click Add. change Drawing List to Sheet Index.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. under Sheets (all). for Sort by. and click Add. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. type T.

and door frames. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Training File Using Legends | 347 . and so on). On construction documents. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. On construction documents. Finally. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. 11 Save the file. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them.9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. windows. doors. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. door frame schedule. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. For the text. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule.

you create a text type with the necessary size. type Typical Symbol Legend. select Arial. and click OK. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. type 3mm. 9 For Text Font. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.Open Level Head . 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 10 For Text Size. for Name. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. and click OK twice. and click OK.rvt. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 6 On the Options Bar. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . click Edit/New. click Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click Symbol. type Legend Text. click . for Name.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.

14 Working from the top down. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . and for Leader. verify that is selected. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. and double-click A101 . click Typical Symbol Legend. 16 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. expand Legends. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note.Site Plan/Floor Plan.

click Modify. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 22 On the Design Bar. select Viewport : No Titlemark.Unit 18. double-click A102 . 18 On the Design Bar. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 21 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : No Titlemark. and click to place it.17 In the Type Selector. under Sheets. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. click Modify. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 23 Save the file. 19 In the Project Browser.

7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Legend Component. select Section. type 4th Floor Wall Types.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. and press ENTER. for Name. select 1 : 50. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. 3 For Scale. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Medium for Detail Level.rvt. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View Control Bar. For Host length. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. For View. and click OK. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. type 900 mm.

13 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. click Text. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 10 Select the second wall. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to add text without a leader.9 On the Design Bar. for Family. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. for Leader.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.

and drag it to the new sheet. 23 In the Project Browser. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. click OK to accept the default titleblock. under Floor Plans. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click New Sheet. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . right-click Sheets (all). click to add text with a single-segment leader. select Level 4. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 19 Type the following text. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser.

under Legends. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 29 In the Project Browser.25 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. The open drawings are both visible. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click Modify to end the command. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click Level 4. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types. drag it onto the sheet.

33 In the floor plan view. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . click (Match Type). select the Wall Type 2 component. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 35 On the View Control Bar. select Detail Level: Medium.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 34 Select the patio divider wall. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.

unanticipated changes in construction conditions. Using the table. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. You can create a sequence of revisions. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click 37 Save the file.rvt. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.36 Optionally. double-click Level 4. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. or changes in building material availability. In this exercise. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. contractor inquiries. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. These changes can be due to owner requests.

all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 5 For Description. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. In general. the revision is locked and issued to the field. If you select Per Sheet. When Issued is selected. For example. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. if the active revision is number 1. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. yet as concise as possible. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. type a date. If Visible is not selected. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. verify that Per Project is selected. In most instances. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. for Numbering. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. 7 Under Show. When you use this option. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 .2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet.

which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project.8 Click OK. including revision number and revision date. 6 On the Design Bar. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. you make changes to the project floor plan. 5 Select the divider. under Floor Plans. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 9 Save the file. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 3 Select the divider. click (Move). and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. move the cursor up. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. double-click Level 4.

and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Revision Cloud. and click OK. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Snaps Off. 8 In the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 11 On the Design Bar. In the Snaps dialog. click near the partition you moved. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition.

15 Under the Revision Clouds category. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. for Line Weight. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. click the Annotation Objects tab. 17 Save the file. select 6. 16 Click OK. you load a revision tag into the project. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise.

and because the revision is the first in the project. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 11 Click to place the tag. select Leader. 10 In the drawing area. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.rvt. 5 In the Tags dialog. the cloud is tagged as number 1. you create additional revisions in the revision table.rfa. double-click Level 4. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . 7 In the left pane of the dialog. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 6 Click Load. 4 On the Options Bar. you need to add one. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Training Files. click Tags.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Tags dialog. You then issue a revision. under Floor Plans. Because you chose to number by project. scroll down to Revision Clouds. click OK. Working with Revisions In this exercise. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 12 Save the file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

Unnamed. You can continue to add revisions. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. You do this by issuing the revision. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. with the description Relocate Door. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and enter a date. type Modify Paving Area. 7 For Description. and enter a date for the revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. and click OK. NOTE After you issue a revision. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. select Issued. you prevent further changes to the revision. double-click A107 . The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision.rvt. click Add. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. you can no longer modify it. under Sheets. 9 Click OK. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 8 Add another revision row.

Relocate Door to the revision cloud.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 2 . Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 11 On the Drafting tab. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown.Modify Paving Area. 12 In the drawing area. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. apply Seq. 3 . 15 On the Options Bar. 19 To add tags. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic.Unnamed. double-click Level 4. for Revision. click to add a revision clouds. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 17 Using the same method learned previously. under Floor Plans. in the drawing area. select the revision cloud. double-click A107 . select Tag ➤ By Category. select Seq. Working with Revisions | 363 . Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. select Revision Cloud. 10 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Project Browser. 13 Click Finish Sketch. under Sheets (all).

25 Click OK twice. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. For each revision. Click Options. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. select Alphabetic. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. beginning with "D". for Numbering. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. height. delete the first 3 characters. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. clear Issued. for Sequence. select the titleblock. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 26 In the drawing area. you edit the titleblock family. You do this so that the revision can be changed. and rotation) to the revision schedule.

and drag it above the schedule area. and click Properties. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. click Edit. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. 33 Select the schedule header. 28 In the alert dialog. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. Clear Blank row before data. Working with Revisions | 365 . click Load into Projects. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click Yes. Select Grid lines. click Yes. select Bottom-up. for Appearance. right-click Revision Schedule. click Edit Family. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog.27 On the Options Bar. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Modify. and press DELETE. Select Outline. under Other. for Build Schedule. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. 34 On the Design Bar.

and the most current revisions display in the available rows. 40 Select the revision schedule header. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Other. enter Rev. and on the Options Bar. select 90° Counterclockwise. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. click Edit. for Rotation on Sheet. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. for Formatting. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. select User defined. When the height property is variable. and click Properties. select the revision schedule. With a user-defined height. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser..The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. for Height. right-click Revision Schedule. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. 45 On the Appearance tab. open the titleblock family for editing. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. 46 Click OK twice. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. for Heading.

click Yes. 51 Save the file. you learn to import information (such as images. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . text. click Load into Projects.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

under Sheets.Title Sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project.Title Sheet. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. for Leader. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo.rvt.JPG. double-click T . 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Text.rvt. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. and place it on a sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Sheets. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Importing Image Files In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 5 On the Design Bar. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. click to add text without a leader. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 3 On the Options Bar.

7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 11 Save the file. with the new text box still selected. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the text. click Modify.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement.doc text file in another window. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 Click OK. 10 On the Design Bar.JPG. click Modify. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. under Sheets. click Desktop.xls. type Fixture Schedule. double-click A102 .JPG. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 4 Under Printer. This process may vary from system to system. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.rvt. 12 Save the file. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.Unit 18. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet.mdi. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select the document writer. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. for Name. for File name.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Save. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. This exercise demonstrates a common method. click File menu ➤ Print. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 3 In Microsoft Excel. This step has been completed for you. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. click Training Files.

To effectively document this project. called dependent views. The large floor plan.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. or footprint. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. as well as a large lab building. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. 371 . you break up the plan into sections. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. click Training Files.

The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 4 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. under Level 2. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. select the crop region. and click Rename. The dependent view opens. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 5 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. right-click Level 2. enter Level 2 . double-click Level 2.Aviary. for Name. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 6 In the drawing area.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser.

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . 9 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region).

10 Click in the drawing area. 12 In the Project Browser. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Zoom To Fit. enter Level 2 . 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout. right-click Level 2. 15 Select the crop region. and on the Zoom flyout. and click Rename. for Name. click Zoom To Fit. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 14 Click in the drawing area.Labs. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

click Modify. click Zoom To Fit. click (Hide Crop Region). (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. double-click Level 2. 19 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. and on the Zoom flyout. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Matchline. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 20 Click in the drawing area. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 24 On the Design Bar. Click above the left corner of the lab building. and click.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 .Unnamed. select Double Dash. select 9. click the Annotation Objects tab. for Line Weight. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Level 2 . expand Sheets. 28 For Line Pattern. right-click A101 . 27 Under Matchline. for Name. and drag it onto the sheet. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. and click OK. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click Rename. 33 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Aviary.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Aviary. 31 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. and click OK.

click Modify.35 On the Design Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.Aviary is selected. for Target view. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. and place the Level 2 . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. click View Reference.Labs dependent view on the sheet. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 39 On the Options Bar.

41 On the Options Bar. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. click Modify. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 44 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Zoom flyout. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline.Labs. click Zoom To Fit. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . for Target view.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

click (Show Crop Region). and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference.Aviary. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . double-click Level 2 . the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. after modifying the annotation crop region. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. 47 On the View Control Bar. 49 If. 48 Select the crop region. click the far right control. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area.46 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

54 In the Project Browser. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. 55 On the Zoom flyout. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. expand Level 1. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. under Floor Plans. 53 In the Select Views dialog. and click Apply Dependent Views. and click OK. 52 In the Project Browser. but are not placed on sheets. right-click Level 2. 51 On the View Control Bar. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. select all views in the list.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . click Zoom To Fit.

and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. click Zoom To Fit.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser. The matchline is already placed in the view. right-click South Elevation. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and double-click South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.57 On the Zoom flyout. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise.

and drag it toward the center of the view. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. cropping the view to the aviary. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. for Name. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. and click Rename. cropping the view to the lab building. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 10 In the Rename View dialog. expand South Elevation. enter South Elevation . 8 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter South Elevation . 9 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region). 7 On the View Control Bar. select the Crop Region. for Name.Left.Right. and click OK. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 11 Select the crop region. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click Rename.The dependent view opens. right-click South Elevation. and click OK.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View | 403 .

404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The perspective view displays.rvt. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. click Camera. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. on the View tab of the Design Bar.

the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . as shown. double-click Site. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. and select the crop boundary. in the Project Browser. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. With the camera shown. and adjust the field of vision. and click Show Camera. under Floor Plans. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. Depending on camera placement. as necessary. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser.3 Zoom out. If the camera is not shown in the view. right-click 3D View 1.

enter Exterior . double-click Exterior . 7 In the Rename View dialog.Day to open the view. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. right-click 3D View 1. 10 Save the file.Day. under 3D Views. and click OK.6 In the Project Browser. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. and click Rename. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 8 In the Project Browser.

c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and render a daytime view of the exterior. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. modify render settings. under 3D Views. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. You then duplicate the view. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior . Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 .Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise.Day.

The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter Spring Equinox . under Lighting. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Sky: Cloudy. In this case. 5 In the Rename dialog. under Background. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. for New. for Sun. You adjust cloud settings as required. for Setting. 6 Click OK twice. select Spring Equinox. 7 In the Rendering dialog. 3 In the Rendering dialog. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. and click Render. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE If a background image is required. 8 Under Quality.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. select Edit/New. You create a location and time for the rendering. and click Rename. 3pm. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day.Santa Monica. select Medium.

Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog.9 In the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. click Show the model. 10 In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. Click Save. click Export. After the image is rendered.png). select Portable Network Graphics (*. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Desktop. click Show the rendering.

under Ungrouped Lights. and click OK.Day.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . under Ungrouped Lights. under Group Options. select Exterior: Artificial only. enter Pool House Lights. under 3D Views. 27 In the Rendering dialog. for Scheme. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . click New. press and hold SHIFT. right-click Exterior . 19 In the New Light Group dialog. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Night. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. and click Move to Group. 21 In the Light Groups dialog.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.120V. under Lighting. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. add 30 :Sconce Light . 22 Using the same method. click Dialog). To select a sequential list. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 25 Using the same method. under Group Options.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.Flat Round : 60W .Night view open. click New. for Name.Flat Round : 60W . click Render. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . select the first light.Exterior . and click OK. you duplicate the view and change the settings. 16 With the Exterior .Flat Round : 60W . and click Artificial Lights. verify that Pool Lights is selected.Day view to Exterior . dialog. and select the last light. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. for Name.Night. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. click OK. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click OK.120V to the Pool Lights group. enter Pool Lights.Flat Round : 60W . on the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

you change the brightness of the exposure. enter 4. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. click Adjust Exposure. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. After the image is rendered. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. for Exposure Value. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . 30 In the Rendering dialog. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. and click OK. In this example. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. under Image. click Show the model. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. 32 Save the file. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson.

rvt. Adding RPC People In this exercise. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and finally. render the views. define the perspective view and rendering settings. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. ■ (Rotate). Exact placement is not important. the person’s line of sight. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. click Component. 5 On the Design Bar. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. Adding RPC People | 413 . 2 Zoom in to the pool house. and on the Edit toolbar. select RPC Female : YinYin. 6 Select the figure.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. and place the component inside the pool house. double-click Level 1.

under Identity Data. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. select Cast Reflections. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. By default. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Render Appearance Properties. click Edit. click (Element Properties). In order to see the figure’s reflection.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. click Modify. under Parameters. 12 Click OK 3 times. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 Save the file. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. on the Options Bar. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. click Edit/New. you can enable this option.

click Camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 .rvt.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.

and click Properties. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.The perspective view displays. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. 4 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under Extents. right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. select Section Box. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window.

you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click South. 8 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). 11 In the 3D view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. In order to accurately adjust the section box. select the section box. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . double-click Level 1. 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. in addition to the 3D view.

size the box as shown. 14 In the 3D view. select the section box. right-click. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 13 In the South Elevation view.12 In the floor plan view. size the box as shown.

you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. and curtain walls. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 17 Save the file. doors that contain windows or glass.15 Maximize the 3D view. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. To create a daytime view. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. and render the interior view.

under 3D Views. You can specify a lower quality. for Setting. enter Interior . 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you turn them off for this scene. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. for Scheme. 5 Click Artificial Lights. and click Rename. under Lighting. 7 Under Quality. 8 In the Rendering dialog. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. 4 In the Rendering dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. clear Pool Lights. and click OK. and click OK.Night. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Draft.rvt. click Render. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. 2 In the Rename View dialog. select Interior: Artificial only. After these settings are established.

but the space will receive standard daylighting. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. 3pm. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. For more information on daylight portals. select Spring Equinox . click Copy To Custom. By default they are turned off. for Sun. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. The preset schemes are read-only. select Curtain Walls. for Scheme.Day. (Show Rendering Dialog). This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. right-click Interior . Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . 17 In the Rendering dialog. 13 In the Rendering dialog. For sunlit interiors. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. select Interior: Sun only.Night. and click Render. for Daylight Portal Options. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes.Santa Monica. in order to turn on daylight portals. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. In this case. you must create a custom setting. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. select Edit. click 14 For Setting. select Region.9 Close the Rendering dialog. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . the daylight portals can be turned on. You create a view for the interior during the day. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog.

under Image. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. 20 In the Rendering dialog. and close the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. Click OK. click Adjust Exposure. In the next steps. enter 1. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. For Saturation. click Properties).18 In the Rendering dialog. select the column on the right. and on the Options Bar. enter 10.

Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . You change the varnish setting. under Output Settings. 29 In the Rendering dialog.6. for Setting. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. and click OK. 30 In the drawing area. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Click OK. click OK.22 In the Element Properties dialog. For Rotate. and click Render. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. 24 In the Materials dialog. For Bump. select Unfinished. add a bump map to create texture. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select Based on wood grain. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. For Width. clear Region. enter 90. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. select High. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Scale (locked proportions). click the dimensions for Size. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. 23 With the column still selected. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. As size and DPI are increased. for Resolution. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. select Wood. the render time increases significantly. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. select the crop boundary. select Printer. and on the Options Bar. For Amount. enter 5''. 26 Click Update Preview.

By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. Usually.The rendered image displays. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. but you can also define it in a 3D. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. independent of the Revit Architecture software. or section view. elevation. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. The walkthrough path is a spline. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In a plan view. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model.

and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and ends in the far corner of the living room. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. click Settings ➤ Project Units. verify that Perspective is selected. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. proceeds through the dining room. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and change unit formats as desired. and click the tab in the context menu. If you prefer to use metric values. expand Floor Plans. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. and open Common\c_Townhouse. click Walkthrough. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and double-click 1st Floor. click Training Files.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all). Creating a Walkthrough | 425 .

The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. on the Options Bar. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. click Finish. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room.

16 On the Options Bar. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 12 On the View menu. verify that Field of view is selected. 11 Under Change. click the dimensions for Size. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. enter 1. click Edit Walkthrough. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. and click OK. If it is not. enter 16''. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . 14 Click . 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Click . click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). enter 9''. on the Options Bar. and for Height. and select the crop boundary. for Width. for Frame. and click OK. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). select the crop boundary.

428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. click Edit Walkthrough. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. clear Far Clip Active.rvt. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. under Extents. press ESC. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. double-click 1st Floor.The walkthrough plays. click (Element Properties). c_Townhouse. proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Options Bar. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.

for Controls. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. and drag it to the location shown. You can move any camera target or key frame position. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. 7 Click the third key frame position.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). select Path. 6 On the Options Bar. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.

select <Shading>. 3 Under Format. specifying the number of frames. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. and click OK. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. hidden line. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. c_Townhouse. on the Options Bar. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. or rendering. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and click OK. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. reducing the size of the image. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. and click Save. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. . When you export the walkthrough. shading with edges.rvt.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. for Compressor. 8 If you want to save this exercise. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. under Output Length. enter 15. double-click Walkthrough 1. If you are unsure of what option to use. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . It produces files that are larger than compressed files. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. click Edit Walkthrough. The walkthrough is recorded. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. under Walkthroughs. 9 To play the walkthrough. for Model Graphics Style. shading. for Frames/sec. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. 431 . ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. More specifically. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. In this tutorial.

A 3D view is created. and double-click 01 Entry. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 1 In the Project Browser. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. (SteeringWheels).rvt. as shown.Courtyard View In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. click Camera. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 4 On the View toolbar.Creating a Solar Study . click shown. expand Floor Plans. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all).

click Section.5 On the Design Bar. you create a section cutaway view. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. click Save As. as shown. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. expand 3D Views. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . 7 In the Project Browser. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. if necessary. double-click 01 Entry. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. 9 On the File menu. right-click 3D View 1. 8 In the Rename View dialog. enter Solar Study . and click OK. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house.Courtyard View. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.

double-click the section head. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click Modify. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. right-click Section 1. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). expand Sections. click .5 On the Design Bar. 11 On the SteeringWheel. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Modify. and click OK. as shown. click 10 On the View toolbar. 6 To view the section. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar.

4 In the Project Browser. In some cases. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. including the house. and click Rename. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . 5 In the Project Browser. click Callout. right-click {3D}. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 16 On the View Control Bar. clear Section Boxes. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. under 3D Views. click Save. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. then select Medium. as shown. 18 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. click . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. then Fine. do not display many elements in 3D. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. and click OK. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 6 In the Rename View dialog. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename. On the Annotation Categories tab. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. you create a plan cutaway view.14 In the Project Browser. 17 To hide the section box. Typical plan views. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry.

so you can see into the building from the top. as shown. as shown. click (SteeringWheels). 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 11 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 9 On the SteeringWheel. click Modify. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 15 Select the Roof. 16 On the View Control Bar. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building.8 On the View toolbar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side.

19 In the Rename View dialog. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . 18 In the Project Browser. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . right-click {3D}. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. under 3D Views.17 On the View Control Bar. click Save. 21 On the File menu. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. under 3D Views. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 20 On the View Control Bar.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. and click Rename. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. and click OK. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway.

For the Single-Day solar study. click . 3 Select Cast Shadows. 2 On the View Control Bar. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. 10 Under Place. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. expand Views (all). and click Duplicate. expand 3D Views.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. click . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. select Los Angeles.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. click click OK. enter Summer Solstice. For this study. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . date range. you specify the location. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. Click the Single-Day tab. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. 9 In the Name dialog. leave the slider at 50.Boston. and time range.Creating Solar Studies . For the Multi-Day solar study. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. USA. USA is selected. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Los Angeles. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . you specify the location. single-day. You can create a still. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. date. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. . and time. MA. for City. or multi-day solar study. CA. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. 4 For Sun Position.

enter 10 and press ENTER. confirm that Summer Solstice. 2008. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. Los Angeles. 2008. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Los Angeles is selected. Clear Ground Plane at Level. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Date. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click Duplicate. Los Angeles. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. select June 22. 2 On the View Control Bar. under Frame. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter Winter Solstice. 14 In this case. click OK. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. click Save. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. on the Single-Day tab.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. enter 20 and press ENTER. 16 In the Name dialog. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. for Sun Position. ■ For Time Interval.Courtyard View is currently displayed. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . select December 22. and click OK. click . 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. Under Frame. 6 On the View Control Bar. click OK. and click OK. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. and click OK. 19 On the File menu. For Time Range. select Winter Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset.

Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. . Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry. 13 On the View Control Bar. . click . 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles. . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Floor Plans. on the Single-Day tab. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click OK. click To play the animation from start to finish. approximately as shown. and click OK. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. 14 On the Options Bar.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. The solar study animation plays. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click To display the next sequential frame. click Text. click . Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. select Summer Solstice. for Sun Position.■ To display the next key frame. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house.

and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 8 For Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click and enter Dining. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 .■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. as shown. 5 In the Project Browser. click . click Lines. click . On the Options Bar. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. approximately as shown. as shown. 6 On the View Control Bar. expand 3D Views. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area.

442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. and click OK. select Frame Range. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Section Boxes. verify that the value is set to 15. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 12 In the drawing area. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 To display the section box. 14 Click outside of the section box. as shown. and click OK. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. if necessary. Los Angeles. clear Section Boxes. and enter 5 to 50. and click OK. 15 To hide the section box. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. select the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. on the Single-Day tab.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Summer Solstice. under Output Length. ■ For Frames per second.

19 In the Video Compression dialog. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.■ ■ Under Format. For Dimensions. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. for Model Graphics Style. verify that Hidden Line is selected. you open each image.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. To maintain the proportions of the frame. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. enter 450 in the first field (width). Under Format. To view the animation. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. click . ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. For File Name.Los Angeles. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. for Model Graphics Style. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that the value is set to 15. 2 On the View Control Bar. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. and click OK. or frame. of the animation separately. click OK. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and enter 5 to 10. under Output Length. For Frames per second. and click OK. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . For Files of Type. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. Click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. select Frame Range. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Compressor. Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select Winter Solstice. on the Single-Day tab. select AVI Files. 3 For Sun Position.

■ For Dimensions. or any single-frame format.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. click Save. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. Click OK. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway .Los Angeles. or GIF. For Files of Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. select PNG. TIFF. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . enter 450 in the first field (width). as shown: 9 On the File menu. under 3D Views. BMP. For File name. click the Desktop icon. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 8 Click Save. such as JPEG. In this example. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. depending on the Frame Range. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser.

2 Select the section box in the drawing area. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown.

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 On the View Control Bar. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Multi-Day tab. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. for Sun Position. MA. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. select One week. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. and click Duplicate. click OK. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . 12 In the Name dialog. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. 5 Select the roof. specify 2:00 pm.Week Interval.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. for File name enter 2pm . 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.Los Angeles . USA. clear Section Boxes. and on the View Control Bar. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. For Time Interval. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.Boston. For Time.

model views. When you mirror a project. Click the Desktop icon. under Floor Plans.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. and annotations in non-drafting views. for File Name. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. In the Length/Format dialog. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). click OK. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 On the View Control Bar. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. you mirror all model elements. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. such as East . for Compressor. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. and click Save.West or North . you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis.South. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. double-click 01 Entry. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog.

click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. The project is mirrored along the East . 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. 6 On the Standard toolbar. click OK. right-click. and click OK. For additional information. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. under 3D Views. select East . 5 In the warning dialog. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .West. select the roof. Then. 2 In the drawing area. In this exercise. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser.West axis.

select Cast Shadows. select Summer Solstice. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. click . specify 11:00 AM for time. on the Still tab. 8 For Sun Position. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. and click OK. 11 For Sun Position. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 10 Under Date and Time. click . 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 5 For Sun Position.3 On the View Control Bar. Orienting to True North | 449 . click the Still tab. click . For example. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 12 Under Date and Time. and click OK. change the time back to 12:00 PM. click Apply. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. click the Still tab. click . 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 For Sun Position. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. When a project is started. right click 01 Entry. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. the view settings must be set for True North. 14 On the View Control Bar. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. and click OK. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. select True North. and click OK. under Floor Plans.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Properties. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). and select Winter Solstice. double-click 01 Entry. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. for Orientation. This process establishes the view setting to True North.

click toward the top of the screen. The floor plan rotates in the view. Orienting to True North | 451 . ■ To establish the new direction of True North.■ To establish the True North direction. as shown. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.

double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 32 On the View Control Bar. select True North. 27 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. right-click 01 Entry. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Element Properties. and click Apply. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. select Summer Solstice. click . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. select Project North. and click OK. select True North Orientation. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. for Orientation. right-click. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for Orientation. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. under 3D Views. right-click 01 Entry. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. click the Still tab.23 In the Project Browser. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. 28 In the Project Browser. right-click. and click Properties. 33 For Sun Position. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. enter True North Orientation.

and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. click the Single-Day tab. Orienting to True North | 453 . and click OK. enter 600 in the first field. for Compressor. click the Desktop icon. for Dimensions. click OK. Los Angeles. click Summer Solstice. For File Name.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. under Format. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. verify that AVI Files is selected. For Files of Type. Click Save. In the Length/Format dialog. and click OK. Click OK.

you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. select Winter Solstice. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. Rendered views do not have this limitation. under Settings. 3 On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for Scheme. under Quality. select Medium.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. and click OK. for Setting. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. select Interior: Sun only. Under Lighting. capturing it. (Show Rendering Dialog). 2 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. and click OK. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. and click Duplicate. In the Name dialog. for Date and Time. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Edit/New. under 3D Views. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. click Render. and exporting it as a JPEG image. For Sun. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. Since a rendered image is temporary.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and 2:00 PM. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. select 12/22.

6 In the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. and click OK. For Files of type. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. enter living area_winter solstice. click Export. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. and click Save. verify that JPEG Files is selected. click Save to Project. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project.

456 .

advanced model graphics. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. and details. 457 . you can choose between realism and stylistics. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. elevations. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Whether the audience is the general contractor. or the client. When organizing presentation graphics. a consultant. however. Other tools in the software. an outside reviewer. In this series of exercises. type. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. For the realistic approach. linework. sections. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. Using the pre-built building model. you explore the stylistic approach. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. They include rendering.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. length. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. In this tutorial. and section boxes. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Co-house.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a presentation floor plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a copy of the plan. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To fit the floor plan into the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. right-click 2nd Flr. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Cnst. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . click in the drawing area. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. 3 In the Rename View dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. Cnst. 2 In the Project Browser. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. and click Rename. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click OK. exit the menu. click Training Files.

11 In the Save As directory.rvt. dimensions. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. No annotations display in the view. Down Arrow. 8 Click OK. and clear DOWN Text. and Up Arrow. navigate to the folder of your choice. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. this represents the view getting smaller. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and other annotations in this view. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. elevations. click the Annotation Categories tab. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. click the Scale control and select 1:100. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand the Stairs category. This turns off the visibility of all tags. 7 Under Visibility. UP Text. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. and click Save. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . sections. Notice the immediate change in the line weights.

modify. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows. 7 For Place. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you can select any city. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and select 1st Flr. NOTE For this step. MA. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. At that place. double-click it in the Project Browser. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. for Date and Time. The higher the number. For Sun Position. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. 9 For City. Time and Place. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. you can create. select By Date. If you select a different city. select Boston. select Sun and Shadow Settings. on the Still tab. and click OK. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 10/27.rvt. click the Place tab. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 12 Click OK. click OK. however. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 Under Settings. ■ For Contrast. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . specify 35. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 1:00 PM. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. the darker the shadows. click . click . Within a project. click (Shadows Off). Cnst.

18 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. under Settings. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. click (Shadows On). clear Ground Plane at Level. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. click OK. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. for Sun Position. and click OK.

5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and notice the view title. 4 In the Views dialog. and click OK. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . click Modify. click Add View. right-click the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the cursor. select Arch Portrait. TIP If the View tab is not available. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place it. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click Add View to Sheet. click Sheet. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click View.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan.

click OK. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and click OK.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. and click Activate View. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . For this analytique. The viewport no longer displays a view title. click Edit/New. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. To accomplish this. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. 12 In the Name dialog. for Show Title. select No. click Duplicate. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. enter Presentation.

you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. click Edit/New. and the boundary of the region. click . You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 22 On the Design Bar. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 18 On the Options Bar. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. When you finish drawing the chain. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. select Invisible lines. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. click Filled Region. click . and select Chain. 17 In the Type Selector. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. If necessary. fill properties. click Region Properties. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector.

click Finish Sketch. under Identity Data. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 33 In the Element Properties dialog.24 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Duplicate. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. select Solid fill. and click View Properties. for Fill Pattern. and click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. under Graphics. 25 In the Name dialog. under Name. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 26 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. enter Presentation. enter Solid Black. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. click OK. click . 28 In the Type Properties dialog. for Sheet Name. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. scroll down.

rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. right-click South. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.

6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. clear Visible. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under Visibility. under Settings. specify 35. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. select By Date. under Pattern Overrides. click in the Walls row. click Override. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. click . and clear Elevation Swing. Time and Place. 9 Click OK. and click OK. 16 In the Name dialog. By changing the angle of the sun.2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. on the Model Categories tab. click (Shadows Off). This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. exit the menu. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Cast Shadows. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 Under Shadow. click Duplicate. and click OK. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. expand the Doors category. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. under Elevations. right-click Copy of South. click OK. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. enter Presentation South Elevation. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click in the drawing area. 13 For Contrast. and click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. specify 2:30 PM. 11 On the View Control Bar. scroll up. 14 For Sun Position. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 18 For Time.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Presentation.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). click Add View. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. double-click A105 . 3 In the Views dialog. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 .

The viewport displays a view title. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. 5 In the Type Selector. The view title no longer displays.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 7 On the Design Bar. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 .6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. click Modify.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Cnst. for Scale.rvt.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click 1st Flr. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). and use the flip arrows if necessary. 4 Add the section shown below. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. under Floor Plans. click Section. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. select 1: 100. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

select 1 : 100.Section 2 is added to the building model. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. expand Sections (Callout 1). 7 On the Options Bar. To fit correctly in the analytique. as shown. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . and double-click Section 2. click Callout. To accomplish this. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. this view needs to be rotated 180°. for Scale. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view.

under Sections (Callout 1). This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). under Pattern Overrides. click the Model Categories tab. enter Presentation Section 2. and click OK. expand the Doors category.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 15 Under Visibility. and clear Elevation Swing. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. right-click Callout of Section 2. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. clear Visible. 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Section 2. 17 Under Visibility. and click OK. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. scroll up. click Modify. click in the Walls row. click Override.

Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. When you select the crop region. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 22 On the View Control Bar. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. 20 Click OK. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. (Hide Crop Region).■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. click The crop regions no longer display.

In addition. double-click Presentation Section 2. For Contrast. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify 35. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. 6 In the Name dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . and click Advanced Model Graphics. 3 On the View Control Bar. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ For Sun Position. specify the following: Under Shadow. 2 On the View Control Bar.rvt. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. and click OK. Click Apply. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Duplicate.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. In the steps that follow. The shadows do not offer much contrast. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. under Sections (Callout 1). in the Project Browser.

select Silhouette Edges. specify 70°. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . for Silhouette style. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. Click OK.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE The line style. Silhouette Edges. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. was added to this training file for training purposes. Select Relative to View. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. For Azimuth. specify 135°. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. For Altitude. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. select Directly. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. click (Shadows On).

click Add View.rvt. under Sheets (all).Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise.Presentation. and click to place the selected view. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. double-click A105 . select Section: Presentation Section 2. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 3 In the Views dialog. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.

under Sections (Callout 1). you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. and press Enter. you click to specify the start radius. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point.5 In the Type Selector. click (Rotate). 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. select Viewport : Presentation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. double-click Section 2. In the steps that follow. The section needs to be rotated 180°. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 On the Edit toolbar. Using a clock as a reference. The view title no longer displays. To rotate an object.

Presentation.The callout rotates 180°. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sheets (all). Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. double-click A105 . 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.

you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . After applying the view template to a new section view. 15 On the Design Bar. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. click Modify. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. and drag it up and to the left as shown.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport.

click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Sections (Callout 1). 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation. 3 In the New View Template dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click Rename. and click OK. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.rvt. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. right-click Section 1. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 4 In the View Templates dialog. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. enter Presentation Section 1. right-click Copy of Section 1. you can simply apply the presentation view template. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. under Sections (Type 1). Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1).

lighting fixtures. and elevation swings no longer display. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.Presentation. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . annotations. 12 In the Views dialog. for Rotation on Sheet. 14 In the Type Selector. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. The furniture. select Section: Presentation Section 1. under Graphics. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 90° Counterclockwise. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . under Names. and click OK. 18 Right-click the viewport. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. click Add View. select Viewport : Presentation. and click Activate View. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 15 Right-click the viewport. select Presentation. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click Deactivate View.

Working in a Callout Analytique Typically.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. traditional analytiques contain a detail. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 21 Proceed with the next exercise. such as a tracery window or a column capital. In this exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.

rvt. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. right-click Callout of Section 1. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Type 1). click Callout. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. double-click Section 1. select the callout. After you add the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. 4 In the Project Browser. as shown. and click Rename.

and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. clear Annotation Crop. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Presentation Callout. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. 6 In the Project Browser. under Extents. 7 Select the crop region. clear Crop Region Visible. double-click Presentation Callout. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. as shown. 8 Right-click. and click View Properties.5 In the Rename View dialog. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

For Scale Value 1. click Modify. and click Activate View. click Add View. 12 In the Views dialog. 14 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. 15 On the Design Bar.Presentation. select Section: Presentation Callout. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. specify 22. and click Add View to Sheet.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Custom. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click A105 . Click OK. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 .

the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. and move it to the position shown below. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. and make adjustments as necessary. The composition set for the analytique is now complete.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. double-click Presentation Callout. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). 24 In the Element Properties dialog. In the steps that follow. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. click Filled Region. 23 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. activate the viewport. click Edit/New. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. and click Deactivate View. When finished. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog.

and click OK 3 times. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. When you are finished. under Sheets (all). 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Activate View. click . You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. for Fill Pattern. select Solid fill. click Finish Sketch. 28 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. double-click A105 . 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click Filled Region. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below.25 In the Type Properties dialog. You do not have to replicate the image exactly.Presentation. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. on the Design Bar.

The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. and sketch the rectangle shown below.31 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 32 On the Design Bar. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . 34 Select the crop region. click (Show Crop Region). 33 On the View Control Bar.

click (Hide Crop Region). 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491.35 On the View Control Bar. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson.

You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. click (Shadows Off). 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 3 On the View Control Bar. click the Scale control.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and apply shadows to the views.rvt. under 3D Views. double-click Isometric. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click 1 : 200. 5 On the View Control Bar.

Select Ground Plane at Level. For Altitude. and click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. select Silhouette Edges. Select 1st Flr. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. For Sun Position. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. right-click Isometric. and click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Click OK. 15 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. specify 45°. specify 35. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. specify 135°. click . for Silhouette style. Cnst. select Directly. select Cast Shadows. and click Rename. For Azimuth. under 3D Views. Select Relative to View. under 3D Views. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. select Section Box. under Extents. double-click Isometric 2. 14 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 2. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . under 3D Views. and click Rename. For Contrast. A section box displays around the building model. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. click Duplicate. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 1. right-click Isometric 1. and click OK. in the list.

19 Select the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box. When you are finished. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. click Modify on the Design Bar. as shown. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box.

under 3D Views. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . right-click Copy of Isometric 2. If desired. and click OK. 27 Select the section box. make a copy of the view. under 3D Views. When you are finished. you can adjust the plane location. 21 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . enter Isometric 3. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 25 To hide the section box. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. Next. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure.Presentation.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. The section box no longer displays. clear Section Boxes. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. the stairs and railings may display. and click Rename. under 3D Views. 23 In the Rename View dialog. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 22 In the Project Browser. 29 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. double-click Isometric 2. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. under Sheets (all). 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 31 In the Project Browser. click Modify on the Design Bar. double-click Isometric 3. under 3D Views. right-click Isometric 2. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. select Viewport : Presentation.

33 In the Project Browser. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. under 3D Views.32 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. The filled region partially covers the view. In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown.

for Fill Patterns. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Activate View.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 35 Select the poche filled region. This will make it easier to draw lines. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 36 On the Design Bar. 40 Click OK twice. click Lines. click Edit. On the Options Bar. select Transparent. 39 For Background. click Edit/New. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. select Concrete. 41 On the Design Bar. 42 Using the drawing tools. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. click Region Properties. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 .

45 In the Type Properties dialog. 47 On the Design Bar. for Fill Pattern. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. click Edit/New. click Region Properties. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Solid fill. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Deactivate View. click Finish Sketch. 46 Click OK twice.43 On the Design Bar. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you create the final view for the analytique. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. click Camera. you add it to the presentation sheet. The view opens immediately. under Floor Plans. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. then you specify the eye direction and range. double-click 1st Flr.rvt. Cnst. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. a cutaway perspective view.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click OK. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. for Name. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify the following: Under Shadow. click . select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Sun Position. 6 On the View Control Bar.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. for Silhouette style. specify 35. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Cast Shadows. For Contrast. select Silhouette Edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off).

12 Select the section box. and click OK. select Section Box. under Extents. A section box now cuts through the building model. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Grips display on each plane of the section box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 .

double-click A105 . 15 On the Options Bar. select Viewport : Presentation. for Width. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Change. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. In the Type Selector.14 Select the crop region. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. you must specify the actual size of the image. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. click (Hide Crop Region). 21 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). select Scale (locked proportions). 18 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. under 3D Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 17 Under Model Crop Size. 19 To hide the section box.Presentation. click Size. clear Section Boxes. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. enter 165 mm.

click Text. under Text. specify a text size of 6 mm. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. click Duplicate. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . 3 On the Options Bar. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . select Text : Title. under Text. specify a text size of 40 mm. and click OK.Presentation sheet is not the active view. select the same font as the title. and click OK. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector.rvt. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. enter Description. click Edit/New. select a font. enter Title. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. double-click it in the Project Browser. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. click . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Edit/New. 6 In the Name dialog. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 16 In the Type Selector. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Modify. select Text : Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 18 On the Design Bar.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

such as walls. Once the model has been imported. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. 507 . and roofs. After you import the SketchUp model. you create a small building from the front mass form. In this tutorial. that compose the building. curtain walls.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. you can easily add detail with Revit components. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

For Import units. 6 In the Save As dialog. under Template file. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and not in the library. for File name. For Colors.rte. or select from a list. click the Massing tab. 4 In the New Project dialog. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. select Auto-Detect. 10 In the Name dialog. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. enter SketchUp Model. 9 In the informational dialog. you create a Revit Architecture project. enter Import SketchUp. click OK. right-click in the Design Bar. select All. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. and click OK. Click the Sketchup file. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. For Layers. click Browse. select Preserve. and click Save. Double-click the Common folder. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. For Files of type.skp. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. visible elements. select SketchUp Files. click Create Mass. buildings.

click Finish Mass. click the Close button. For Place at level. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. select Level 1. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . select Manual . In a new project. 14 On the View toolbar. 17 In the warning dialog. click . ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. Level 1 is the only choice. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. and roofs. Click Open. curtain walls.Center. 16 On the Design Bar.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. depending on the complexity of the project. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. such as walls. ■ ■ For Positioning.

select the face so that it highlights in red. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. and roofs. for Level. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. After you create the building from the mass faces. 4 On the Options Bar.400mm displays. and on the View Control Bar. that compose the building. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. click Roof by Face. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.18 Proceed to the next exercise. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. 3 In the Type Selector. verify Level 2 is selected. curtain walls. such as walls. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. verify Basic Roof: Generic . Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

6 On the Options Bar. click to display masses. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. click Create Roof. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. click Create Roof. To see the new roof.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. 9 On the Options Bar. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. on the View toolbar. A roof is created from the mass face. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. verify that Select Multiple is selected.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. on the Options Bar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.

12 On the Design Bar. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Roof by Face. click Create Roof. 14 On the Options Bar.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

click roofs that you created. click Wall by Face. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . select Core Face: Exterior. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. click Modify to end the command. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.15 On the Design Bar. verify Basic Wall: Generic . Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. 22 In the Type Selector.200mm displays. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. for Loc Line. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. to turn off the mass visibility in the view.

29 Select the left face of the left mass.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 25 On the View toolbar. 28 In the Type Selector. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Curtain System by Face. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. click to view only the walls and roofs.

32 On the View toolbar.30 On the Options Bar. 31 Using the same technique. click Create System. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.

click Roof by Face. click Wall by Face.35 On the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 38 Select the mass face shown below. click Curtain System. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. select the other wall. click Create System. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. and select it. click Create Roof. and on the Options Bar.

Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . 42 On the View toolbar. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. click to view the building that you have created. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. and select the mass face shown below. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. click Wall by Face.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. specify a point to place the camera. Below the right corner of the view. under Floor Plans. click Camera. double-click Level 1.

to view only the walls. click your building in the view. specify a point for the camera target. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. 48 On the View toolbar. Click the frame to display its grips. roofs. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. as shown. The perspective view created by the camera displays. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building.

click Modify. Click OK. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . and select the left curtain system in the view. for Justification. select Center. 50 On the Options Bar.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . Under Grid 1 Pattern. click . Under Grid 2 Pattern. select Center. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. for Justification. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view.

click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 63 In the Type Selector. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 59 On the View toolbar. double-click 3D View 1. 55 Right-click. under 3D Views. click Door. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. and move the roof edges as shown below. 56 In the Project Browser. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.54 Select each roof to display its grips. and click Cancel to end the command.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below. 65 Save and close the drawing.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

grid lines. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. To switch panel types. For example. This affects the entire curtain system. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. and you can change these elements individually. you need to select a panel. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and mullions. Like windows. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you select the grid.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. to resize the system. click Training Files. panel. To change grids. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Unlike windows.rvt. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a curtain system using the wall command. and they are not windows. 525 . Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Like walls. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. you need to change the length of the wall. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. or you can use a specific curtain system command.

select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and double-click Ground Floor. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building.1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

and double-click Southeast Isometric. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Creating an Entrance | 527 . 8 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.

using curtain grids. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. and click (Properties). Click OK. and room bounding.11 Select the curtain system. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. top constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. enter 1200. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . For Top Offset. top and base attachments. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels.

15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall.a. and click OK.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevation 1 . 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 25 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 20 In the drawing area. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and resize the crop boundary as shown. click Elevation.

select SECOND FLOOR. while pressing CTRL. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. click Curtain Grid. click Modify. THIRD FLOOR. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. SIXTH FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. and SEVENTH FLOOR. Click to place another grid line. one larger than the other. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. FIFTH FLOOR. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. FOURTH FLOOR. 33 On the Design Bar. Click to create a vertical grid.26 While pressing CTRL. and click OK.

and on the Options Bar. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Instead of using the Door command. click Add or Remove Segments. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. and then select the segment above it. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. The two segments are removed. The segment line style changes to dashed. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. 35 Select the left vertical grid line.Next. Creating an Entrance | 531 . and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system.

and lock them. click Curtain Grid. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 39 On the Design Bar.38 Using the same method. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. select One Segment. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown.

TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. Creating an Entrance | 533 . Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 43 Delete the dimensions. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. Use the following image as a guide. click in any white space to exit the editor. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays.

This changes the graphics style of the Next. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. not as curtain panels. click Training Files. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 57 On the View Control Bar. 55 In the Project Browser. 56 In the Project Browser. Now. They are part of the curtain panel category. and click Wireframe. on the new curtain system you added. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . under Floor Plans. 54 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl.Next. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click view. These panels schedule as doors. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. double-click Entrance Elevation. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 52 On the Type Selector. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. click Modify. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. . 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. The panel changes to a double door.rfa.

click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 61 With the panel still selected. click System Panel : Solid. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels.60 On the Type Selector. 63 Click OK twice. click . and Material specifies the shading and patterning. The glazed panels display in blue. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 65 On the View Control Bar. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. and the solid panels display in white. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels.

1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select Entire Grid Line. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. click Save As.rvt. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 4 On the Options Bar. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress.68 On the File menu. select Grid Line Segment. you place mullions on curtain panel grids.

The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 10 Delete the mullions below them. You are going to change some mullion joins. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . there are a few that you do not want. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. so you remove them next. select All Empty Segments. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. clickModify. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. however. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click.6 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.

13 Click the lower mullion join control. 15 On the Design Bar. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. Finally. double-click Southeast Isometric. 17 Save the file. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 14 Click the top mullion control. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. click Modify. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. you can also right-click.Two mullion join controls display. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 16 In the Project Browser.

for Top Constraint. For Top Offset. (Arc passing through three points). 7 On the Options Bar. Curved Curtain System | 539 . under Floor Plans. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. click Wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. Finally. double-click GROUND FLOOR. you add a curtain system using the wall command. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. enter 1200. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

click Curtain Grid. and then sixteenths. double-click East. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. eighths. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. under Elevations. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. You are going to use one of these snaps points. Divide the halves into quarters. you place grids on the system. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Next. 14 In the Project Browser.

Next.300mm.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. select the bottom layer of panels. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. to filter out all 19 Save the file. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. click Modify. you change some panels in the system. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 16 On the Design Bar. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. select Basic Wall: Generic . 18 In the Type Selector.

1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Lines. and click .Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Model Lines. double-click Exterior. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 3 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. for Depth. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. . clear Chain. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. under Elevations. enter 100. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click . 6 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. select Glass. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. click Training Files. click Finish Sketch.rft. and on the Options Bar. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion.

23 Right-click.Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. and return to the project file. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted.rfa. All fourth floor panels are selected. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click FOURTH FLOOR.Pattern. 24 On the View toolbar.rfa family. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. under Floor Plans. click 25 On the View toolbar. select Curtain Panel . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid.Pattern. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click (Default 3D View). and save the family as Curtain Panel . 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.14 On the Design Bar. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. right-click. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . and click Change Walls Orientation. (SteeringWheels). 19 In the Project Browser.

The finished arc wall should look like the following image. under Floor Plans. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 27 In the Project Browser. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. right-click. 29 In the Type Selector.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. All the panels change to the solid panel. All fifth floor panels are selected.Solid. select System Panel . 30 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid.

and enter 50 mm for the radius. 8 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. click Lines. select Mullion. For vertical mullions. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile.rft. under Elevations. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and select it. . 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. click ■ ■ For Sides. and click OK. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. Click again to specify the ending point. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. double-click East. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. click Mullion. for Profile Usage. enter 8. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. Select Radius.

31 Click . 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 28 On the View toolbar. and click Visibility. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. under 3D Views.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . double-click Southeast Isometric. click (SteeringWheels). clear Fine. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Modify. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. click Modify. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog.rfa family.rfa. and click OK. 27 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Options Bar. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and return to the project file. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. and click OK. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 19 On the Design Bar. clear Coarse and Medium. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 17 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click Mullion. click Training Files. After the new profile is loaded. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.11 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the detail component.detail. click Visibility. it can be added as a mullion type. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

33 Click Edit/New.32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. for Profile. double-click GROUND FLOOR. You have placed more mullions than you want. click Duplicate. so you remove the unwanted ones. under Floor Plans. 36 Under Construction. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 40 On the Design Bar. right-click. select Circular Mullion for Family. 41 In the Project Browser. 37 Click OK twice. 38 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select All Empty Segments. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 43 Press DELETE. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. 44 Save the file. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name.

double-click TOP OF ROOF. and a ruled curtain system. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. a storefront system. select Defines slope. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. and press TAB. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. make custom curtain panels and mullions. All the inside faces highlight.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 4 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and you can click to select them all. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. you learned to create a curved curtain system. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. TIP To chain select all the walls. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. In this lesson.

13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Sloped Glazings | 549 . 10 In the Project Browser.7 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. double-click Southeast Isometric. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. click Modify. 11 On the View Control Bar. enter 600. 17 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 9 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Mullion. 18 Save the file. Click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. select Entire Grid Line. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. under 3D Views. click Roof Properties. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 5 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 2400. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 4 In the Type Selector. select Unconnected for Height. click Wall. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. double-click GROUND FLOOR.Storefront System In this exercise. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . under Floor Plans.

8 Click the temporary dimension. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. double-click Southeast Isometric. To see how the grid layout is defined. under 3D Views. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. click Edit/New. 10 In the Project Browser. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. even if the wall height changes. enter 10200 mm. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. and click . 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. and press ENTER. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 9 On the Design Bar. For this wall. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. click Modify. 12 Select the storefront wall. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. which is specified in the type. Storefront System | 551 .

Under Vertical Grid Pattern. double-click Southeast Isometric. By setting the Angle value. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you find Number. or end. 18 On the Options Bar. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. click Mullion. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. enter 15. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. For more information about these curtain wall parameters.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. see the Revit Architecture help. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. center. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 20 Save the file. select All Empty Segments. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. Justification. 16 Click OK. and Offset. 19 Select a curtain grid. under 3D Views. Angle. In this exercise. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading.

Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. and highlight the model line. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 6 Click the highlighted line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.3 On the View Control Bar.

11 Click OK. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want.8 Select the highlighted line. click Curtain Grid. 10 Select the panel. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Next. 9 On the Design Bar. and click . A panel between the 2 lines is created. click Modify. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system.

In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. right-click. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and then eighths. 18 Save the file. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 16 In the Type Selector. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. quarters. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. select System Panel : Solid. embed a curtain system inside another wall. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. and then eighths. quarters. Finally. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . and define a ruled curtain system.

556 .

a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. In this exercise. you learn how to add fascia. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. Before you can sketch the roof profile. In this tutorial. 557 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn to create several different types of roofs. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide.Roofs 15 In this lesson. You do not need to create the work plane. gable. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. and open Metric\m_Roofs. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.rvt. including hip. In addition. and low sloped roofs. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. mansard. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. shed. and soffits to the roofs that you create. gutters. In this lesson.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. expand Views (all). Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. select Name. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Go To View dialog. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and double-click Level 1. 4 Click OK. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. expand Floor Plans. click Ref Plane. click the blue square on the witness line. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. centerline. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. and so on). verify Level 3 is selected for Level. verify that Section: Section1 is selected.

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .

click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. sketch the roof profile. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. click Lines. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile.Next. 13 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 16 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. select Chain. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane.

press TAB. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). expand Sections (Type 1). so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and then select the exterior face of the wall. 17 On the Tools toolbar. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. click Modify. expand Views (all). 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. and double-click Section 1. 21 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the edge of the roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. press CTRL. and select the second wall. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . 19 On the Tools toolbar. Next. The roof should resemble the following illustration. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway.

you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Attach for Top/Base. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. click model.

verify that Defines slope is selected. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Pick Walls. m_Roofs. and double-click Garage Roof. 5 On the Options Bar.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. and click Yes. Next. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof footprint. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 3 In the Project Browser. and enter 600 for Overhang.

(Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. and click OK. 15 On the View toolbar. select both slope definition lines. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 14 When you see the informational dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. 11 Press CTRL. clear Defines slope. By default. Next. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click (Properties). 13 On the Design Bar. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 8 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. click the model. click Modify. under Dimensions. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof.

click Pick Walls. and double-click Level 3. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. press TAB. When you complete the roof.rvt. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. clear Defines slope. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. m_Roofs. and enter 600 for Overhang. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. expand Floor Plans.

click Lines. select Defines Slope. Next. 13 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 8 On the Options Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 15 On the Options bar. add new slope lines to the roof. sketch the chimney opening.6 Click to select all the walls. click (Rectangle). click Finish Roof. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 17 When you see the informational dialog. Next. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. select Defines Slope. 9 Using automatic snaps. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 10 On the View menu. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

expand Views (all). you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint.rvt. click Pick Walls. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 2. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . expand Floor Plans. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567.18 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. m_Roofs.

10 On the Options Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Next. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Next. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 11 To trim the first line segment. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. click Lines.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. select the left vertical slope definition line. 9 On the Tools toolbar. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. clear Defines Slope. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). close the roof sketch. 7 On the Options Bar. and click (Pick Lines). using the following illustration for guidance.

18 On the Design Bar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. click Finish Roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . 14 Under Constraints. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. Next. 16 On the View toolbar. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click (SteeringWheels). and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Roof Properties. and click OK. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 17 On the View toolbar. click Modify.

use the Join Roof command to fix the roof.21 Click (SteeringWheels). click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Next. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 23 On the Tools toolbar. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . join the two remaining walls to the roof. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.

expand Floor Plans. enter 0 for Overhang. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. and enter 300 for Overhang. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. m_Roofs. click Pick Walls. Next. 6 On the Options Bar. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. press TAB. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. clear Defines Slope. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click (Trim/Extend). and double-click Level 2. 9 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. expand Views (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 4 On the Options Bar. select the left vertical roof line. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 .

11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. select Defines slope. expand 3D Views. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. m_Roofs. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 Under Constraints. (SteeringWheels). click Modify. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 21 Proceed to the next exercise. click Roof Properties. 1 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. you add a slope-defining line. Next. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 13 On the Options Bar. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. expand Views (all). you add slope arrows to the shed roof. click 20 On the View toolbar. and double-click 3D. and press ENTER. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. and click OK.

15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. expand Floor Plans. clear Defines Slope. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 On the View menu. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Tools menu. 4 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). Next. Before you can add slope arrows. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 12 On the Options Bar. add two new slope arrows. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. Next. click Modify. click Split Walls and Lines. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click Slope Arrow.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. click (Pick Lines). To help locate the position of each split. and enter 600 for Offset. and double-click Level 2. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 7 On the Options Bar. you need to add two reference planes. click Ref Plane. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.

When you sketch a hip roof. and then click OK. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. select Slope for Specify. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click Garage Roof. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. the adjacent eave heights must align.rvt. 16 Repeat steps 13 . enter 500 for Rise/1000. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. and move the cursor to place the arrow. and click 19 Under Constraints. expand Views (all).■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. select both slope arrows. (Properties). 18 Press CTRL. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. click Edit. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. m_Roofs. click Modify.15 to add the second slope arrow. When eave heights differ. 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Under Dimensions. Begin the tail at the right reference plane.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. on the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. select a method to align the eaves. 13 On the View toolbar. When aligning eaves. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 If you want to save your changes. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The eave lines display with a dimension. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. click Save As.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). select Defines Slope. 5 On the Options Bar. under Dimensions. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. (Properties). Next. and click OK. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 10 On the Options Bar. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. on the File menu. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . 12 On the Design Bar. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. click Align Eaves.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. expand Elevations. click Training Files.rvt. on the Options Bar. under Constraints. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. and double-click North. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. click Modify. expand Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Select the roof and. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. (Properties). 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.

click Lines. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . and then select Defines slope. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. Next. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. click . 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.6 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click (Pick Lines). create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. press TAB. click Modify. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click Finish Roof. under Dimensions. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Floor Plans. and select the remaining three lines. expand Views (all). 7 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Training Files. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. After you add the roof. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof.rvt. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 20 Proceed to the next exercise.17 On the View toolbar. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click mansard roof. on the File menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Save As. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you add a roof to a building shell. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. 4 On the Options Bar. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 .Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. verify that Defines slope is not selected. 5 In the drawing area. click Pick Walls. double-click Roof. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 3 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend).Insulation on Metal Deck . 7 On the Tools toolbar. and click OK.Because the walls are not continuous. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Roof. 11 On the Design Bar. for Type. select Steel Truss .EPDM. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. click Roof Properties. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. and click to select it. under Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. click (Draw Split Lines). 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. 16 On the Options Bar. double-click the section head to open the section view. double-click Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . The roof has been created. In the next steps.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area.

move the cursor horizontally to the left. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. and select a point on the opposite roof line. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 18 Move the cursor down. 20 Using the same method.

The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. In this exercise. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. on the Options Bar. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. click (Modify Sub-Elements). (Add points). exact placement of the points is not important. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . 23 On the Options Bar. Next. You modify the points individually.

24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. and press ENTER. enter -2''. for the dimension. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Modify Sub-Elements).

31 Select the roof slab. and press ENTER. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. 29 On the Design Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . including the interior edges of the roof regions. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. click (Properties).27 Press and hold CTRL. enter 4''. for Elevation. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. and select all of the roof edges. and on the Options Bar. click Modify.

32 In the Element Properties dialog. and Soffits on page 586. click Edit/New. After you create a roof. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. gutters. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and Soffits In this lesson. under Construction. Creating Fascia. By making the insulation layer variable. select Variable. gutters. for Structure. for the Thermal/Air Layer. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. click Edit. and soffits in Revit Architecture. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. In some cases this type of slope is desired. Creating Fascia. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. Gutters. 35 Click OK 3 times. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 36 View the results in the section view. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. you learn how to create roof fascia. 37 If you want to save your changes. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. and soffits. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. you can easily create its fascia. click Save As. Gutters. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . on the File menu. The entire slab is sloped. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result.

select M_Fascia-Built-Up. enter Built-up Fascia. 3 Press CTRL.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. and click OK. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. and open Common\c_Condominium. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. under Construction. click Training Files. and click OK twice. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. and click Open. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click (Properties). 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Creating Gutters on page 588. c_Condominium. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. 13 On the Design Bar.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. click (Properties). 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating Gutters In this exercise.

10 Click to place the gutter. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. Creating Soffits on page 590. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. and click OK three times. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value field for Material. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog.3 In the Properties dialog. Creating Gutters | 589 . 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. under Construction. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. .

1 In the Project Browser. expand Views. 3 On the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. and double-click Roof. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Roofs. c_Condominium. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs .Creating Soffits In this exercise.

4 Select the roof. Creating Soffits | 591 . expand 3D Views. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the roof. 6 In the Project Browser. click Join Geometry. expand Views (all). and then select the soffit to join them. click Finish Sketch. and double-click 3D. 7 On the Tools menu.

click Save As.9 If you want to save your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

click Training Files.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. your values will be different. select Millimeters. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Project Units. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. Finally. For Unit Suffix. Click OK. 3 Under Area. 2 In the Project Units dialog. In the final exercise. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. 593 . under Length. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. select mm. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. select Square meters. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. If you are using metric units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Area.rvt.

expand Floor Plans.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click Room and Area. click Settings. select m2. select 2 decimal places. For Unit Suffix. expand Views (all). and verify that Level 1 is the active view. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. Click OK. the system-computed height defaults to the level. click OK. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . or 0. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. 9 Click Cancel. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. click the Room Calculations tab. it is not necessary in this exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. click the Area Schemes tab. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. 4 In the Project Units dialog. These schemes define spatial relationships.

notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building).Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. forming a closed loop. click Area Plan. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. 13 In the Project Browser. rather than the area tag. Click OK. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. When you select Yes in this dialog. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. click Area. To modify the area. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. If you select No. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. under Views (all). you must select one of the reference lines. you must manually add these boundary lines. 12 When the informational dialog displays.

verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 21 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. When you pick the walls. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. If you do not select this option. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. click Area Boundary. you can either draw them or pick them. When you add area boundary lines. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. and store area. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. common areas. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click Area Plan. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. Next. Click OK. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass.

click Area. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ . click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. click Modify. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. Select Office area for Area Type. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. and click to select the area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 .23 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name.

Select Office area for Area Type. 32 On the Options Bar. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps.■ Click OK. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. click ■ ■ ■ . 31 On the Design Bar. click Area. 29 On the Design Bar. Click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. click Modify and select the area. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 33 In the Element Properties dialog.

and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.■ Click OK. enter Core for Name. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. 35 Add an area to the building model core. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. and select Store Area for Area Type.

600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Color Scheme Legend. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. In this exercise. name the project Area-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and click Save. 37 On the File menu.Notice that within the two store areas. and click to place the legend. In the next exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Save. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory.

click Schedule/Quantities. select Area Type and click Add. click the Fields tab. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. and click OK. select Areas (Rentable).3 When the dialog displays. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 7 Under Available fields. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category.

9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .

Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. building elements. or both. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. If you modify a massing face. you can specify the view to display massing elements. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. and perimeter information. and roofs. floors. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. After creating mass floors. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. After you make building elements. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. curtain systems. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. volume. you then need to update the building face. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. In this tutorial. roofs. At any time. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. and floors. floor. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You assign the default wall. 603 .

sweeps. click Create Mass. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start.rvt. double-click Level 1. and cutting geometry. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Massing. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. under Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. click Training Files.

and click OK. select Mass (Opaque). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Finish Sketch. for Name. 10 In the Materials dialog. 15 On the View Control Bar. click Extrusion Properties. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 13 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. (Line). and on the Options Bar. and click . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. (Pick Lines). enter 1550 mm. under Floor Plans. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). 16 On the Design Bar. click 18 On the Options Bar. click Lines. click the value for Material. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. and on the Options Bar. enter 25000. for Offset. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. click Lines.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. for Extrusion End. under Views (all). 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. and click OK. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . double-click Level 1. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. under Materials and Finishes.

for Extrusion End. and click OK. 23 In the Materials dialog. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. select Mass (Transparent). 22 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click West. for Name. highlight the larger form. click Extrusion Properties. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 25 On the Design Bar. enter 25000. under Views (all). The second form is on top of the first form. 26 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. click the value for Material. TIP If necessary. and click . under Constraints. 21 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. under Materials and Finishes. enter 27500. under Views (all). for Extrusion Start. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. press TAB to highlight the entire face.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 30 In the drawing area. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Design Bar. double-click {3D} to see the results. select Pick a plane.

32 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Lines. and clear Chain. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. 34 On the Options Bar. click (Arc passing through three points). and on the Options Bar. click (Draw). and click to select the line start point. (Pick Lines). click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Next.31 Click to select the face. 37 On the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 .

click (Move). double-click East. 41 On the Edit toolbar. click Edit Top. 45 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 39 On the Design Bar. and delete the vertical construction line.TIP If you do not see this option. (Line). click the arrow next to the drawing options. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. under Views (all). click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Lines and. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Modify. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 46 On the Design Bar. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line.

In the next exercise. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 53 On the View toolbar. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. click Finish Sketch. click 49 Create an arc as shown. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . click Blend Properties. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. 52 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). 50 On the Design Bar. (Arc passing through three points).48 On the Options Bar. and click OK. for Material. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise.

place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 9 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options bar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. 10 On the Options Bar. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element.rvt. click Ref Plane. under Floor Plans. as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 2 In the drawing area. click Lines. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. m_Massing_Start. select the mass. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. click (Line). and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. and select Chain. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 7 Using the same technique.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise.

12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. on the View Control Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. snap the corners to the intersections. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. for Extrusion End. enter 0. 15 Click OK. 16 On the Design Bar. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. 14 Under Constraints. Using Swept Blends | 611 . 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. click (Default 3D View). In this exercise. click Finish Sketch. click Extrusion Properties. When sketching each extrusion.

612 | Chapter 17 Massing . 4 On the Options Bar. ■ For the radius.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. m_Massing_Start. and click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. click Sketch 2D Path. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. select a point below the mass elements. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1.

click (Rectangle). 10 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 . click Profile 1. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. 6 On the Design Bar. click Finish Path. click Lines. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 8 On the Design Bar. and click Edit. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. click (Default 3D View). verify that <By Sketch> is selected. The only way to align these elements is visually. 11 On the Options Bar.

) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. click Finish Profile.13 On the Tools toolbar. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. 17 Using the same method. click (Align). Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. and press ESC. 15 On the Design Bar. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Profile 2. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc.

click <By Category>. click Finish Profile.18 On the Design Bar. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties. click Finish Swept Blend. 23 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent). and click . 21 In the Materials dialog. Using Swept Blends | 615 . under Materials and Finishes. 22 Click OK twice. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.

Finally. In this exercise. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise.rvt. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. You place several instances of the mass families into the project.24 On the Design Bar. you create new family types from a mass family file. click Finish Mass. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

and click Apply. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 6000 mm. under Other. 6 For Width. 5 Click New. and click OK. and click OK. 8 For Width. for Height. for Height. In this exercise. 9 Click OK. 3 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. enter 18000 mm. and click Apply. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. enter 9000 mm. click Family Types. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 46000mm. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 18000 mm. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. enter 15000mm. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.rfa. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. for Depth. for Width. for Depth. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . enter 11000 mm. and click OK. and click Apply. enter 68000 mm. 7 Click New. 4 In the Family Types dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Family Types dialog. and for Name. enter 12000 mm. and for Name.rfa. click New. for Height. for Depth.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the View Control Bar. as shown. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 1 If not already selected.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. under Views (all). click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 2 In the Project Browser.rfa. click Training Files. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. You also load other existing mass families and place them. and Triangle. Arc Dome. on the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families.rfa family files. 6 Open the Box-Training.rfa. (Show Mass) to show the massing model.rfa. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.rvt. Semi Barrel Vault. click Place Mass. 8 In the Type Selector. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. click Training Files. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing .

19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 17 Press CTRL. and click OK twice. select the triangle. 21 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. and click to place the mass. select Rotate after placement.10 On the Design Bar. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Transparent). click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 20 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and click OK twice. specify Mass (Opaque). 11 Select the box. and on the Options Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 14 In the Type Selector. as shown. for the Material parameter. click (Element Properties). 25 In the drawing area. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. enter 90 for Angle. 24 On the Design Bar. select the 3 boxes.

click (Default 3D View). 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 33 On the View toolbar. click Place Mass.26 Select the triangle. for the Material parameter. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. and click OK twice. specify Mass (Transparent). 29 In the Type Selector. specify Mass (Opaque). 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. for the Material parameter. and click (Element Properties). and click OK twice. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). 620 | Chapter 17 Massing .

NOTE When you join geometry.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. (Join Geometry). In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.rvt file. In the next exercise. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. you join these mass elements. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. click (Default 3D View).

6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. on the Edit toolbar.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. click (Mirror). Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 4 Select the triangle.

Joining Mass Elements | 623 . as shown. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. (Join Geometry). and snap to the midpoint of the edge. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. click (Draw). 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. enter SM. and then select the triangle.8 On the Options Bar. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. for Axis. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 17 Press ESC to see the result. click (Default 3D View).

click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. 1 On the Design Bar.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar.rvt. (If Design Options is already selected. do not clear the check mark. 2 On the Window menu. click (Add to Design Option Set). and select the triangle mass element. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. you joined mass elements together. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element.In this exercise. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. click Modify.

9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Sloped (primary). Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . and click OK twice. click Place Mass. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 8 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. under Views (all). 5 In the Project Browser. for Angle.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. specify Mass (Transparent). Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 17 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Type Selector. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. click Modify. and click (Element Properties). 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. clear Curved. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. 14 In the drawing area. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 13 On the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. enter 90. and click OK.

Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Views (all). and watch the status bar. select Curved. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 23 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. and click OK. click (Add to Design Option Set). and click OK twice. under Views (all).TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. select the three arc domes. under 3D Views. 19 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. double-click North. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . 21 In the Element Properties dialog. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. for the Material parameter. click Modify. clear Sloped. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. While pressing CTRL. specify Mass (Transparent). TIP To find the correct shapes. and click (Element Properties). 20 In the drawing area. 22 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}.

30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 31 Click the value for Design Option. and click Close. In this exercise. 34 Close the warning that displays. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 .rvt. under Option. click the Design Options tab. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Curved and. 33 In the Design Options dialog. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. and click OK. 35 On the File menu. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. select Curved from the Design Option menu. click (Design Options). you placed mass elements into Design Options. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. you can make it the primary option. click Make Primary. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options.

6 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall: Exterior . click Training Files. 2 On the View toolbar. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create walls. select Wall Centerline. double-click {3D}. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Pick Faces). click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing .Brick on CMU. 5 In the Type Selector.rvt. and for Loc Line. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

11 In the Project Browser. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. 15 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. under Floor Plans. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. under Views (all).The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. double-click Level 3. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. 8 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. double-click Level 5.

20 On the View Control Bar. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. under Views (all).18 Select all the faces shown in red. 21 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. If desired. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 19 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. double-click Level 9.

you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. select all levels. and Walls. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. and exterior surface area. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass.rvt. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. double-click {3D}. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Model Categories tab. and click OK. volume. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area.In this exercise. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. under Views (all). click Mass Floors. 4 Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. perimeter. click Modify. clear Curtain Panels. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Curtain Systems. When you select levels. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

10 Press CTRL. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. select Levels 1-4. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing .9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Mass Floors. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. and click OK.

and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. and click OK.14 On the Options Bar. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. select Level 1. click Mass Floors. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. 15 Press CTRL.

Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. and click OK. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Category. schedules can be created using the mass floors. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. and click Add. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. under Available fields. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. Floor Volume. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Mass Floor. Floor Perimeter. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . 4 Using the same method.rvt.In this exercise. press and hold SHIFT. select Floor Area. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. and select Level. The Floor Area.

you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. select Mass: Family and Type. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. The Mass Floor Schedule displays.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Usage. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . and click OK. for Sort by. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. enter Retail. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text.

under Scheduled fields (in order). the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. for Fields. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. click Edit. 13 With Usage selected. click Move Up until Usage is listed first.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. After you assign usage. expand Schedules/Quantities. under Other. 14 Select Level. select Mass: Family and Type. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. and click Remove. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Move Up until Level is listed second.

click Edit. select Floor Area. for Field formatting. and in the field below. 23 In the Rename View dialog. under Other. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 27 Click OK twice. and click OK. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. select Level. elevation. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. select Usage. for Filter by. select Calculate totals. in the field under Filter by. and plan views. for Then by. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. for Filter. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. select Usage. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). enter Hotel. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . click Edit. under Other. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. for Sort by. under Fields. 22 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Properties. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 19 Click OK twice. 18 On the Filter tab. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. 16 On the Formatting tab. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. for Filter. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Grand totals. and click Rename.

Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. by level. under Views (all). Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. click Roof by Face.In this exercise. you created mass floor schedules. 1 In the Project Browser. you pick massing faces to create roofs. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt. the floor area. double-click {3D}. The mass floor schedules list. floor perimeter. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

click Create Roof. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.400mm. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. Your model should now look as shown. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. select Basic Roof : Generic .4 In the Type Selector.

in the Type Selector. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. Curtain Systems. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Using the same method. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. select Curtain Panels. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Sloped Glazing. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. and click OK. click Create Roof. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. In this exercise.8 Using the method you just learned. and Walls.

6 On the Options Bar. click Create System. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 .Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 5 Press CTRL. click Curtain System by Face. under Views (all). 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown.

7 Using the same method. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . select the blended form on the in-place mass. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.

9 On the Options Bar. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . 11 Using the same method. click Create System.

Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.rvt. you change the size of an existing mass family.12 Click Modify to exit the command. In this exercise.

you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 3 On the Model Categories tab. enter 30000. and click (Element Properties). 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. and then click OK.1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Curtain Systems. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. Next. Floors. and Walls. under Views (all). clear Exclude Design Options. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. click Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Roofs. 2 On the View menu. for Width. double-click Site. clear Curtain Panels.

under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click Level 1. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown.10 Open the 3D view to see the result.

17 Select the roof as shown.TIP To select the curtain wall. click OK. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. click Remake. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 14 On the Options Bar. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. you want to select the smaller one. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . click (Default 3D View). Also. 16 On the View toolbar.

648 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Remake. and click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.

under Schedules/Quantities. In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. 1 Open the 3D view. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.rvt.20 In the Project Browser. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. you changed the size of an existing mass family. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements.

click All to select all categories. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. 7 Clear one of the check boxes.Massing only. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. 8 Click None to clear the selection.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 6 On the Model Categories tab. and click OK. 9 Select Mass. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 4 Rename the view 3D .

You might create the model shown. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. such as columns and an extruded roof. If desired. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . This concludes the massing tutorial. to the building shell. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components.In this exercise.

652 .

By grouping objects. you also simplify the modification process. all instances in the building model are updated. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. For example. In another exercise. When you make changes to a nested group. you not only simplify their placement.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. In this exercise. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. In this tutorial. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. the host group is also updated automatically. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. Modifying. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. you add the new model group to a previously created group. After you create a model group. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. You mirror one instance of the group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. You can also nest groups within other groups. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. 653 . Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. place. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. The new group is considered nested within the host group. or with those working on a different project. hotel rooms. and typical office layouts. Creating. and modify repetitive units.

NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter ZR. expand Views (all). and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.rvt. and double-click First Floor. 2 Click in the drawing area. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files.

enter Typical Kitchen.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. and click OK. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . 4 On the Edit toolbar. click (Group). 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.

click Modify. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 7 On the Design Bar.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area.

11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. under Groups. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . and click Create Instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. click Modify. right-click Typical Kitchen. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Model.

14 On the Edit toolbar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . clear Copy. click (Mirror). 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

click (Rotate). Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the Edit toolbar. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. one mirrored. and one rotated. as shown. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. When you finish editing. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Modifying a Group | 661 . all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modifying a Group In this exercise. you make changes to an instance of a group. and click to select it. click Save As. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen.Save the training file 22 On the File menu.rvt. press TAB to highlight the wall. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory.

click Modify. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element. and click to select the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. and click to select the wall. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.). press TAB. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 4 Move the cursor over the door. and click member to group instance.).).3 Click (Group Member. 8 On the Design Bar. select the element. press TAB. 7 Click (Group Member.

click Door. 10 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 663 . move the cursor to the left. 15 On the Options Bar.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 14 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Wall. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. select Basic Wall : Generic .127mm. 12 On the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement.

21 On the Options Bar. move the cursor up. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group.17 On the Design Bar. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 23 In the drawing area. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. All other elements in the model are grayed out. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. In edit group mode. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. click Edit Group.

for Unconnected Height. enter 1000. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. (Element Properties). and the wall and folding doors for the closet. Nesting Groups | 665 . All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. you add the Typical Kitchen group. enter 2134. 26 Select the opening. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 29 On the group editor toolbar. and click OK. created in an earlier lesson.25 On the Design Bar. which acts as the host. under Constraints. click Finish. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. click 28 For Base Offset. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Nesting Groups In this exercise. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save.

in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click First Floor. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 4 On the group editor toolbar.rvt. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 5 In the drawing area. click (Add to Group). click Edit Group. select the Typical Kitchen group.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

and each of the bifold doors.6 Press TAB. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. click Finish. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Nesting Groups | 667 . 7 On the group editor toolbar.

such as door and window tags. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. double-click First Floor. you add door tags to a group. In the next exercise. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as text. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. under Floor Plans. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. and filled regions. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan.

and select a point below the left elevator. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click to draw a rectangular region. 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.

12 Enter Tile. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. as shown. and select the text note and the filled region. and click OK. click (Group). click Text. and on the Design Bar. 16 In the drawing area. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. 9 On the Options Bar. click to add an arc leader. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model.

it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Create Instance. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 20 In the Project Browser. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. under Floor Plans. expand Detail. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. double-click Second Floor. Because the detail group contains variables. under Groups. 21 In the drawing area. 22 On the Design Bar.

manner that a drawing component can be added. clear Leader. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. click Tag ➤ By Category. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. as shown. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. double-click First Floor. click Modify. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. under Floor Plans. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. 11 In the Project Browser.7 On the Options Bar. click Check None. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. select Door Tags. and click OK. for Attached Detail Group Name. double-click Second Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . and click OK. click (Group). enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click (Filter Selection). 8 In the Filter dialog.

you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. and click OK. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. click Place Detail. When you load the group from the library into a new project. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . therefore.

5 In the New Project dialog. click OK. select 2 Bedroom Unit. browse to the Desktop. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor.rvt. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. verify that Same as group name is selected. click Modify. In this case. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Create Instance. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. verify that Project is selected. and click OK. expand Groups. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. for Create new. A warning dialog displays. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click Desktop. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Open. under Groups\Model. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. and click Save Group.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and expand Model. and click Save. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). accept the default template file. 3 For File name. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 .

You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click Link. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Training Files. 18 In the Project Browser. select the linked Revit model. click Modify. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Remove Link. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. and click OK. verify that Attached Details is selected only.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 24 In the message dialog. click OK. click Use Existing. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 23 In the confirmation dialog.rvt. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. expand Revit Links.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Bind. and the link is removed. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. When a group is converted to a link. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and on the Options Bar.

In the final exercises. You add property lines manually. Using Site Tools In this lesson. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. and then modify the data. you add a building pad to the site. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project.Site 19 In this tutorial. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. islands. and walkways. convert the data to a table. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. 677 .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_First_Project. In the second part of this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a toposurface using two different methods. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Site. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. expand Views (all). you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan.rvt. and click Site. This project file was created using the default metric template. right-click in the Design Bar. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. Using the first method. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Design Bar.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. click Toposurface. click Point. 678 | Chapter 19 Site .

The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Use the following illustration as a reference. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point.

click Finish Surface. click Site Settings. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . 13 In the Site Settings dialog. under Increment. enter 1500mm. and 18000mm absolute elevations. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. 11 On the Design Bar.8 On the Options Bar. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. Use the following illustration as a reference. 12000mm. 12 On the Settings menu. under Additional Contours. and click OK. 15000mm.

Before importing the contour data. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. on the Standard toolbar. 14 On the View toolbar. and double-click South. click to delete it. click Modify. and press ENTER. (SteeringWheels). under Views (all). 16 On the View toolbar.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). enter 1000mm. click the elevation value. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 18 In the Project Browser. modify the level names and elevations. click to view it at various angles. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 19 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Default 3D View).

Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. Click Open. For Layers. select Specify. select Preserve. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 30 On the Edit menu. rename the level Base Site Elevation. Verify that Current view only is not selected. click Training Files. 23 Click the Level 1 text. click Modify. and press ENTER. Until it is exploded. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 29 Select the imported topography. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 28 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. it is considered an import symbol. click Yes. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. and press ENTER. under Views (all). rename the level Basement. For Colors. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Floor Plans. click Pin Position.21 Click the Level 2 text. double-click Site.

and then click OK. click Modify. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click the Annotation Categories tab. When you select the import symbol. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. clear C_INDX. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 36 On the Design Bar. select it. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed.31 On the Design Bar. and click OK. clear Elevations. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 34 Under Visibility. when the edges highlight. 32 On the View menu. click Toposurface. Creating a Toposurface | 683 .

you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. and click Save.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. Adding Property Lines on page 684. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. name the project Site-in progress. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Using the second method. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. this project file is required in its current state. 42 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.rvt. click (Default 3D View). click (SteeringWheels). you add property lines using two methods. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 40 On the View toolbar. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. Using the first method. click Finish Surface. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 39 On the Design Bar.

you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. On the Design Bar. Click Modify. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. Adding Property Lines | 685 . Select and delete the right vertical line. do so before continuing. click Lines. click Property Line. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Site-in progress. select Create property lines by sketching. and click OK. under Floor Plans. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.rvt. 4 On the Design Bar.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. click Lines.

add an arc line on the right. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. A warning dialog is displayed. click 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. click OK. when they highlight. select the lines. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. and click OK. 9 In the warning dialog. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. on the Standard toolbar. 8 On the Options Bar. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. click OK. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click Property Line. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. select Edit Table. to delete them. 6 On the Design Bar. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings.

This means there is no gap in the property lines. 19 In the Tags dialog. click to place the property lines. If the gap is not closed. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 15 Starting in Row #1. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments.14 In the Property Lines dialog. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 16 Click OK.

32 Proceed to the next exercise. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off.dwg and click OK. The tags display more prominently in this view. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. click Tag ➤ By Category. 22 In the Tags dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. In the final step. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Training Files. In the next exercise. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. Before adding property line segment tags. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. you created two sets of property lines. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. In this exercise. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data.20 Click Load. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 30 On the View Control Bar. and click Drafting. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Imported Categories tab. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. 25 Under Visibility. 27 On the Options Bar. 23 On the View menu. this project file is required in its current state. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. clear Leader. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines.rfa. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click to place it. you modify site settings and contour line visibility.

select Single Value. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. select Dash dot. and click OK. In the Object Styles dialog. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. select Topography. Under Subcategory. Under Line Pattern. 2 On the Settings menu. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. click New. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. under Contour Line Display. select a shade of Brown. click Object Styles. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Site Settings. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. select Working Contour. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Under Line Color. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. enter the name Working Contour. 7 Click OK. Site-in progress. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. enter 1000. for Subcategory. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. Under Range Type. 10 Under Additional Contours.0mm. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start.rvt. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog.

You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. and islands. In this exercise. Working Contour. The object style subcategory. you create subregions in order to define roads. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. parking areas. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. you create topographic subregions to define roads. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. The next exercise requires a new training file. and islands. parking areas.11 Click OK. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. such as material. In the next exercise. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties.

click Subregion. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar.rvt. and open Metric\m_Site. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Training Files. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. click Lines. 2 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. try to replicate the location and proportion. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below.

692 | Chapter 19 Site . the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. When you finish the sketch in a later step. click Properties. select Site . under Materials and Finishes.Tarmacadam for Name. click the value for Material. click Finish Sketch. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. and click OK. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 6 In the Materials dialog.NOTE In the Metric training file. and click to open the Materials dialog. enter Parking for Name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography.

As you create new subregions. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration.9 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces.Tarmacadam. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. 12 On the View Control Bar. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. click Edit Boundary. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. and double-click Topography Schedule. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. under Floor Plans. they display within this schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site .

double-click Site. under Floor Plans. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. In this training project. 17 On the View Control Bar. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 18 In the Project Browser. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. click Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Subregion. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Topography Schedule.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View Control Bar. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . 22 On the Design Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Within each subregion. Delete overlapping lines. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Notice that the project area has increased. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration.23 In the upper-right parking area. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. under Identity Data. click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser. click Properties. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Topography Schedule. enter Island . under Schedules/Quantities. click the value for Material.Grass for Name. 28 On the Design Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . 24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Materials and Finishes. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. 29 On the View Control Bar. and click to open the Materials dialog. select Site .Grass for Name. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

walkway. under Schedules/Quantities. and apply the material Site . double-click Site. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. 696 | Chapter 19 Site .Grass. double-click Topography Schedule. click Subregion. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 32 In the Project Browser. Name each region Island Grass. You must sketch each region separately. under Floor Plans. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . Name the subregion Walkway. 34 On the Design Bar. click Lines. double-click Site.31 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Design Bar.

there is still only one toposurface. under Schedules/Quantities. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . click Finish Sketch. double-click Topography Schedule. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 38 In the Project Browser. 37 On the Design Bar. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm.

this project file is required in its current state.rvt. double-click Site. 2 Select the toposurface. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. When you use the grading tool. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Save. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. under Floor Plans.

Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . Notice that the toposurface displays differently. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. and click Select and Edit. select Existing for Phase Created. 7 In the Graded Region dialog.3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. see the tutorial. click (Element Properties). and click OK. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. click Graded Region. 8 Select the topographic surface. Using Phasing on page 761. 5 On the Design Bar. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. under Phasing. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. select Copy Internal Points. A warning dialog is displayed.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 700 | Chapter 19 Site . Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 10 Press DELETE.

and new.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 11 On the View Control Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. demolished.

Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click Point. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Finish Surface. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar.13 Press DELETE. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 18 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View).

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. click View Properties. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . 23 Select the toposurface. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. (SteeringWheels). only the original toposurface displays. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Therefore. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. this project file is required in its current state. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. and click OK. Only the graded topography displays. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. click View Properties.20 On the View toolbar. under Phasing. and delete it. specify Existing for Phase. specify New Construction for Phase. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a building pad. and click OK. under Phasing. When you add a building pad. you can delete it. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 24 On the View menu. click to view it at various angles. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding a Building Pad on page 703.

click Pad.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. the Pick Walls command is active. 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Lines. Site tutorial-in progress. If you have an existing building model. NOTE By default. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Sketch. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. double-click Site.

see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. click (Default 3D View). Adding Site Components on page 706. 7 On the View Control Bar. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 On the View toolbar. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. Notice the new building pad. click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 9 On the View toolbar. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . this project file is required in its current state. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

90 deg. Site tutorial-in progress. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. and select the parking space. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. click Parking Component. click Modify. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm .Adding Site Components In this exercise. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. 706 | Chapter 19 Site .

NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. 8 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Adding Site Components | 707 .

Notice the new parking spaces. choose any tree type. under Floor Plans. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. 12 In the Type Selector. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . click (SteeringWheels). 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Site Component.9 On the View toolbar. double-click Site.

In the following illustration. click (SteeringWheels). 14 On the View toolbar. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. Adding Site Components | 709 . NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. click (Default 3D View). the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 15 On the View toolbar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click OK. and click Apply. click Tag All Not Tagged. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 On the View menu. this project file is required in its current state. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. click Apply. under Floor Plans. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. click Hidden Line. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. double-click Site.

You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. outside of the site. Click up and to the left. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. to position the shoulder of the leader. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. In the following exercise. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. Click again to the left to position the leader. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 .Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. 8 On the Options Bar. as shown: 10 Using the same method.

click Modify. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 12 Press and hold CTRL. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 712 | Chapter 19 Site .■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 11 On the Design Bar.

15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the Design Bar. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . this project file is required in its current state. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space.■ Clear Leader. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. click Modify. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder.

click Schedule/Quantities. and under Heading.rvt. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab. click Close Hidden Windows. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Type. enter Space. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 12 In the Site plan. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. select Mark. 8 Under Fields. under Space. select Type. 11 On the Window menu. and under Heading. select Mark. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. and click Add. 10 In the Project Browser. 7 Under Fields. 5 Under Available fields. under Floor Plans. enter Size. number the first three spaces consecutively. under Views (all). Site tutorial-in progress. and click OK. click Tile. and click Add. select Parking for Category. 6 Click the Formatting tab.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 9 On the Window menu. If necessary. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . 4 Under Available fields. and click OK. double-click Site. The parking schedule is displayed.

15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . 14 In the Parking Schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. under Space.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically.

716 .

and click Editable. they cannot make changes to it. Working in a shared project In a shared project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. A workset is a collection of building elements. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. and so on. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. such as walls. you specify an active workset. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Elements specific to a view. go to the Worksets dialog. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. called Worksharing. you must first enable Worksharing. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. The first time you activate worksets within a project. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. To make a workset editable. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. In this tutorial. you can select which worksets are open or closed.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. floors. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. All other team members can view this workset. When you are working on a shared project. After the project is shared. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. use Element Borrowing. Using Worksharing. You can enable Worksharing for any project. doors. stairs. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. such as annotations and dimensions. however. select the desired workset. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time.

and View worksets. In the next exercise. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. In the lessons and exercises that follow. such as a tenant interior. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. Experience has shown that. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. In a multi-story structure. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. When setting up Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing.dialog. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Instead. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. for a typical project. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Shared Levels and Grids. You should have at least one workset for each person. After learning the fundamentals. In most projects. not including the Project Standards. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you may want to create separate worksets for each portion.

a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Team member roles Typically. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. As new members create worksets for their own use. For example. each team member has control over a portion of the design. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. if a workset named Interior was created. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. When you create a new workset. When creating the new worksets. designers work in teams. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. On this tab. Regardless of the default setting. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. with each assigned a specific functional task. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view.

each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Therefore. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. your changes are saved. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. When finished or at regular intervals. you can select which workset is active. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you make that workset editable by you. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. however. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. However. you should then save to your local file. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. the file is saved as the central file. When you save to the central file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. proceeds as usual. your changes propagate to the entire team. On the Options Bar. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Generally. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. After saving to the central file. As you work. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. This makes them available to other team members. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. within the local file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. This is called “Selective Open. When you save locally (to your local file). When you save to the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need.

You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. In this conceptual exercise. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. To do this. In this situation. In this instance. for instance. you should check out the Materials workset.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. In the next exercise. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. using VPN. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. When working remotely. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . and then save the local file. make any required worksets editable. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. save to the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. and make that workset editable. reload the latest changes from the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. if you know who checked out the required workset. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. Alternatively. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out.

You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. under Show. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Your username displays as the present owner. The Worksets dialog displays.rvt. and notice all are editable by you. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. and open Common\c_Worksets. When you enable worksharing. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 3 In the Worksets dialog. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. click Training Files. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Worksets.

Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 16 In the drawing area. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. 12 Click Rename. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Only User-Created worksets should display. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. 13 In the Rename dialog. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 8 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. For example. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. it is better to make them visible by default. 17 On the Options Bar. In this simple training project. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. select Workset1. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". click . and Views. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. imagine four users including yourself. You do. Project Standards. type the name Exterior Shell. 14 In the Worksets dialog. under Identity Data. ■ 5 Under Show. clear Families. expand Views (all). For training purposes. In this case. currently named Workset1. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. you can rename the default workset. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . click New. a small number of team members are working on the building model. clear Visible by default in all views. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. click OK. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. another is assigned the interior layout. Therefore. 9 Click New. and click OK. 11 In the Worksets dialog. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Because the interior walls appear in many views. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. When you initially activate Worksharing. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. In this training file. however.

Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view.19 Click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. click . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and walls. select Interior Layout for Workset. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. click . 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. and click OK. 29 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Identity Data. 23 Select all of the interior elements. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click the Worksets tab. select Interior Layout for Workset. stairs. including the interior doors. 26 On the View menu. 21 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Select one of the interior walls. under Identity Data. Hold Shift down to deselect an element.

under Floor Plans. click Worksets. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. under Views (all). 44 On the File menu. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. and click OK. click . under Identity Data. 42 On the right side of the dialog. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. click Visibility/Graphics. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. If any interior elements remain. click Close. click the Worksets tab. 30 On the View menu. 34 In the drawing area.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you enabled Worksharing on a project. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. Now that you have created the central file. select Interior Layout for Workset. 38 In the Save As dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 32 Select Interior Layout. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Level 2. click Non Editable. 39 Click Save. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. In this exercise. 41 In the Worksets dialog. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 43 Click OK. 35 On the Options Bar. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. click Save As. and click OK. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets.

14 On the Worksets toolbar. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 12 Click OK. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 13 On the Window menu. expand Views (all). please do so before continuing. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 2 In the Open dialog. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and double-click Level 1. select Interior Layout for Name. and click Save. expand Floor Plans. Before working on the model. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. In addition. select the central file. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. click Save As. 7 In the Save As dialog. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you should activate the Worksets toolbar. and select Yes for Editable. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. In this case. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. click Open. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. make modifications to the building model. click Options. select Interior Layout. select all the User-Created worksets. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. click Worksets. 15 In the Project Browser. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. check out worksets. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 4 Click Open. Next. 6 On the File menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and select Specify. and click OK. If you have not yet completed the exercise. you create your local file.

On the Options Bar.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . In the Worksets dialog. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 22 Click OK. 24 Click OK. however. click Worksets. click Modify. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. Because this element is not owned by another user. In this case. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 18 On the Options Bar. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. Verify that it is cleared. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. under Identity Data. 21 On the Options Bar. you can still edit this wall. 20 Under Constraints. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. click . 23 On the File menu. If it was owned by another user. click . notice the Editable Only option. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. If this is selected.

and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 31 On the Design Bar. 26 Delete the door. click Modify. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. and modify the length so that the corridor is open.126mm Partition (2-hr). click Wall. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 29 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Interior . 34 In the Type Selector. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Door. The precise location is not important.

you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. a tooltip. By default. click Save to Central. make elements editable. you should perform regular saves. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. please do so before continuing. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. checked out worksets. two users access the central file through a network connection. you should relinquish all worksets. If you have not yet completed these exercises. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. you created your local file. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. Whenever you save. When working in your local file. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. For training purposes. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. each user must check out worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. In this particular case. Throughout the process. add two door openings into the rooms you created. In addition. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. At the end of a work session. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. You modified the building model. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. displays the workset as well as the element type. leave this file open in its current state. save to central. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . In this exercise. Borrowed Elements is selected. and save locally immediately afterward. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. which matches the information in the Status Bar. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. and reload the latest changes. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. it is recommended. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session.

10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. click Worksets. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click OK. click Options. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and select Specify. This file is for your use only. For training purposes. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 12 In the Save As dialog. instructions are staggered.rvt. 3 On the Settings menu. and select Yes for Editable. skip the following section. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and proceed to Creating a local copy. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. click Options. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Throughout the remainder of this exercise. one user has already created a local file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. click Save As. enter User 2. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. User 2: Create a local file. click Open. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 15 On the File menu. You now have a local copy of the project. specifically sequenced. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and reset the Username to your computer login name. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 9 Click Open. select the central file. consider that person to be User 1. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and click OK. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. return to the Settings dialog. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. 4 Click the General Tab and.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. under Username. and click Save. In the following section of this exercise. and click OK. select all the User-Created worksets. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. In addition. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. 7 In the Open dialog. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 11 On the File menu. This is a system setting. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2.

click Worksets. click Save to Central. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. select the lower exterior wall. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . 28 In the Save to Central dialog. and select Yes for Editable. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. and double-click Level 1. User 1: Check out worksets. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. If you only have one workset checked out. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. If it is not open. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. modify the building model. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. open it now. and move it upward approximately 2 meters.You are now the owner of that workset. it becomes the active workset. 23 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. 17 Click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 19 On the File menu. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists.” 29 Click OK. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. 27 On the File menu.

right-click Level 1. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. The changes User 2 made are apparent. select Yes for Editable. 43 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 42 Select Furniture Layout. User 1: Reload latest worksets. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. click Save to Central. click Reload Latest. 46 In the Project Browser.” 35 Click OK. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and click Rename. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Save to Central. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. and click OK. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 37 On the File menu. When you save to central. Before adding any furniture. 41 On the File menu.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. click Worksets. under Floor Plans. and click OK. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 44 In the Project Browser.” 39 Click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Views (all). any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. However. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. you should create a furniture plan view. Click Yes. 33 On the File menu. 45 In the Rename View dialog.

and click OK.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 62 On the File menu. 65 Click OK. click the Worksets tab. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. rather than Families. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. enter Exterior Wall . choose any desk. click Save to Central.” 55 Click OK. 53 On the File menu. 66 On the File menu. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. are placed under Project Standards. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 61 Click OK 2 times. click Edit/New. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. such as Wall Types. 50 On the View menu. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 48 In the Type Selector. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility.200mm. and click inside any room. 60 In the Rename dialog. click Component. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Therefore. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. under Show. click Reload Latest. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click Element Properties. the Visible by default option was not selected. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. NOTE System families. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Rename. click Save to Central. and click OK. click Worksets. select Project Standards. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 49 On the Design Bar. 63 In the Worksets dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 .

70 On the File menu. click Training Files. This exercise requires two users and. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Each user must have network access to the central file. click Options. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. In subsequent steps. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. select Reload Latest. and published their changes back to the central file. and save 69 On the File menu. you save the training file as a central file. Each user checked out worksets. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. and still have your local files open. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. select the following. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. leave this file open in its current state. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Checking out worksets. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. finished the previous workset exercises. modified the building model. As each of you work. select Save to Central.rvt. 3 In the Save As dialog. At the appropriate point in this exercise. click Save As. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. User 1: Reload latest. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. There are specific instructions for each user. throughout this training. and these problems are rectified. leave this file open in its current state. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. In the final exercise of this tutorial. you need to set up your central and local files. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file.

Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. The central file should still be open. 5 Click Save. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. This is a system setting. 6 On the File menu. and click OK. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and select Specify. You have created a local file which is for your use only. In addition. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select Make this a Central File after save. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Next. return to the Settings dialog. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. click Open. and click OK. 17 On the File menu. and click OK. click Options. This is the local file for User 1. 18 In the Save As dialog. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 13 In the Open dialog. and click OK. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 12 On the File menu. 15 Click Open.4 In the File Save Options dialog. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Set the Username to User 2. and click Save. click Options. click Save As. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. click Save As. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. select the central file. and click OK. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and click Save. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. On the Settings menu. click Options.

and select Yes for Editable. and then click OK. 26 In the Worksets dialog. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. You are now the owner of that workset. click the File menu. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. click Worksets. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You are now the owner of that workset. select them. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. After you submit the request. 27 Under Active Workset. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. double-click Level 1. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. verify that Editable Only is cleared. click Worksets. Afterwards. select Interior Layout. and click Editing Requests. At this point. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. select the Interior Layout workset. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 24 Under Active Workset. and select Yes for Editable. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 29 On the Options Bar. 30 On the left exterior wall. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. select Exterior Shell. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 22 In the Worksets dialog. under Floor Plans. and click Open. select the second window from the top. and then click OK.

A message informs you that your request has been granted. select the following. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . to Local. 36 Click Close. and close 39 On the File menu. 38 Click OK. and the other user granted it. 35 Click Grant. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. click Check Now. select the request submitted by User 2. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and notice the window is in the new location. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. In this multi-user exercise. In this case. you requested permission to edit the element.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. select Save to Central. click Close.

738 .

At any time in the design process. In this particular case. After you and the client agree on the final design. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. For example. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you can have multiple sets of design options. The client has asked you to create various options. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. 739 . you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In this tutorial.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. In addition. Using design options. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.

The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project.rvt. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the second exercise. With the second option. you can edit it. TIP In this exercise. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. each is constructed for interchangeability. therefore. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. 2 In the Design Options dialog. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). After you create a design option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you design each of the structural options. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). In the final exercise of this lesson. click New. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. under Option Set. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. and click Close. each with multiple design options. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. make your final design decision. and delete the unwanted options from the project. click Training Files. click Edit Selected. the roof and structure systems must work together. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. you set up multiple design option sets. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. the only available command is to create a new option set. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.In the first exercise in this lesson.

Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. click Modify. add three columns. TIP To center the middle column. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 11 On the Edit toolbar. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. 5 On the View menu. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). or add a dimension string between the columns. 9 On the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . In this case. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. expand Floor Plans.4 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). select: ■ ■ ■ . the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. and the third column centered between the two. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. click Column. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. In the following illustration. 7 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. click 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. By selecting Multiple.

Because of the size of the columns. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. click . add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. they are difficult to see in this view. using the same technique. A copy of the three selected columns is added. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 17 Zoom out and. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. When you are finished. 18 On the View toolbar.

and click at its center to set the beam start point. 19 In the Project Browser. Adding a beam is a two-click process. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. click Modify. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Use the following illustration as a guide. click Beam. select Round Bar : 50mm. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Zoom in on the upper right column. under Floor Plans. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. The second click specifies the end of the beam.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . In it. The first click specifies the beam start point. 21 In the Type Selector. Next. you add the beams that span the columns. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. double-click TOP OF CORE. 23 On the Design Bar.

744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 30 On the View toolbar. move down to the next set of columns. click 26 On the Options Bar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. click . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. zoom into the left column.25 On the Edit toolbar. select: ■ ■ ■ . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 28 Zoom out. and click the center point.

enter Roofing for New. click Rename. 34 In the Design Options dialog. click New. click Rename. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click Rename. under Option. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option Set. click Rename. under Option Set. name the option Louvers. 37 Select Option 2 and. and click OK. not a new option set. 40 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. select Option 1 (primary). click New. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 32 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Option. and click OK. under Option. 33 Click Finish Editing. 36 In the Rename dialog. 41 Under Option Set. enter Beam for New. click New. click Rename. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. and click OK. enter Brackets for New. enter Structure for New. under Option.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. There should now be two roofing design options. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 38 In the Rename dialog. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . 43 In the Rename dialog. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 45 Under Roofing. 46 Under Option.

48 Under Option. click Rename. under Floor Plans. name the option Sunscreen. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. select Edit Selected. 51 Under Edit. 53 In the Project Browser. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. Under Now Editing. double-click ROOF TERRACE. When finished. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. under Structure. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Option 2. select Beam. it will resemble the following illustration. 52 Click Close. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. you create the second design option. and click OK.47 Under Roofing.

Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Refer to the following illustration. click Align. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 58 On the Tools menu. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . 56 In the Type Selector.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Roof Beam. click Component.

65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The first click sets the move start point. The second click represents the move end point. 61 On the Design Bar. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ .60 After aligning the beam. on the Edit toolbar. click Modify. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 62 Select the beam and. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.

Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 69 Click Close. 66 On the View toolbar. m_Urban_House-in progress. and click Save. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. Notice that even before you close the dialog. 67 On the Tools menu. name the file. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click . click Finish Editing. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Save As. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 .Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. you need this file in its current state. which is visible by default. 70 On the File menu.rvt. 68 In the Design Options dialog.

The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. under Roofing. select Louvers (primary). 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The first option. do so now.In this exercise. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 4 Under Edit. 5 Click Close. If you need to add dimensions. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. each with multiple design options to pick from. Under Now Editing. expand Views (all). Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. 10 Referring to the following illustration. In the next exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. Sunscreen. 3 In the Design Options dialog. click Component. a Louver system. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 2 On the Tools menu.rvt. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you design each of the roofing options. open it now. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. The second roofing system. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 8 In the Type Selector. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you set up multiple design option sets. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. click Edit Selected. the other for beams. delete them after the rafter is in place. With the second option.

11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 11750 mm for Length. and click OK. click . click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. Select 2nd for Move To. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 13 On the Options Bar. Enter 5 for Number. 15 On the Edit menu. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. click Array. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. Select Constrain. 12 Select the rafter you added previously.

and press ENTER. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . when the listening dimension displays. enter 990.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.

26 On the Options Bar. 27 For the array starting point. enter 5475 mm for Length. click Modify. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . click the Edit menu. 25 With the louver still selected. Select Constrain. Enter 34 for Number. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click Component. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Array. 20 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Other. click . The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. and select the louver you just placed. and click OK. Select 2nd for Move To.

29 On the View toolbar. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. and press Enter. enter 300. click .28 Move the cursor vertically downward. when the listening dimension displays. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and.

select Sunscreen. click Lines. expand Elevations. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option.The louver roof system is complete. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 31 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . under Edit. 33 Under Editing. under Roofing. 39 On the Design Bar. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 34 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. and then click Close. 30 On the Tools menu. and double-click West. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. click Edit Selected. 40 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. click . Click OK. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. Therefore. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Finish Editing. In this case. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen.

enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. the top of the next column on the right. Under Constraints. You will fix this in a later step. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 46 On the Tools menu. Select the right arc. click Finish Sketch. click Properties. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. then you can modify it through the dimension. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 48 On the Design Bar. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 43 On the Design Bar. 49 On the View toolbar. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. Under Constraints. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. The arcs should connect.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. click . 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and the third point defines the arc. then the center arc. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. The first two points define the ends of the line. 45 Click OK. click Trim/Extend. 41 Select the top of the left column. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 44 In the Element Properties dialog.

do so now. under Views (all). and click OK. you need this file in its current state. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under Edit. tertiary. 2 In the Project Browser. click Save. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. you designed each of the roofing options. click Finish Editing. and then click Close. right-click {3D}. enter Primary Option. After exploring the combinations.The louver roof system is complete. 52 On the File menu. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. a Louver system. and click Rename. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. and click Duplicate. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. and last options. The second roofing system. 50 On the Tools menu. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 51 In the Design Options dialog. under Views (all). and delete the discarded design options. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. make it part of the building model. Managing Design Options | 757 . click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. The first option. under 3D Views. expand 3D Views. secondary. In this exercise. you select a design. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. Sunscreen. Managing Design Options In this exercise. 4 In the Project Browser. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise.

under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. and click Rename. double-click Primary Option. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. under Views (all). 11 On the View menu. under Views (all). double-click Secondary Option. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under 3D Views. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 10 In the Project Browser.5 Right-click each of the copies. 7 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 9 Click OK.

click the Design Options tab. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. In this case. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. under 3D Views. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. Managing Design Options | 759 . double-click Last Option. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. At this point. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. and click OK. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 19 On the View menu. under Views (all).14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View menu. double-click Tertiary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all). In your design options. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option.

you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. An alert is displayed. 35 On the File menu. select Make Primary. 24 Under Option. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. After exploring the combinations. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 31 In the alert dialog. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Yes. click Accept Primary. and deleted the discarded design options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you selected a design. In this exercise. Because the client has selected the design option. 29 Select Roofing. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. the beam option becomes part of the model. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. select Beam. 26 Under Option Set. click Delete to remove the views that used options. since you no longer need them. made it part of the building model. click Close.22 On the Tools menu. 30 Under Option Set. This was the client choice for structural. click Delete. click Save. 23 In the Design Options dialog. click Yes. double-click Primary Option. 27 In the alert dialog. 25 Select Structure. under Structure. the current primaries are no longer options. The set is deleted. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views.

You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. demolish existing walls and doors. 761 . For the client. In the lesson and exercises that follow. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. and then add new building model elements. demolish existing construction. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. You create new phases. complete with schedules. In the second exercise. In the second exercise.Project Phasing 22 In any project. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. This changes room definition and total building model area. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. then add new walls and doors in a different location. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation.

and click OK. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. and open Common\c_Phasing. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. regardless of phase. expand Floor Plans.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click Cancel. and double-click Level 1. define the units. During the demolition and renovation process. When you create a new project. As you add new elements to the building model. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). go to the Settings menu. click Project Units. click Training Files. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 5 Select any of the exterior walls. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. 4 Click Cancel. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. 6 On the Options Bar. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. click Modify. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. In the Element Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. This means that all building model elements. under Phasing. under Phasing. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. are visible in this view. If you wish to do so. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides.

click . and click OK. right-click Level 1.Existing. 17 Click No. under Phasing.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. click Modify. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. 16 In the Rename dialog. and click Rename. clear Door Tags. 10 On the Options Bar. TIP If this were a multi-story building. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. 19 In the Project Browser. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. select Existing. are highlighted in red. Because this is a phase-specific view. Phasing Your Model | 763 . it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. 11 In the Filter dialog. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. right-click Level 1 . you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties.Demo. After you release the mouse button. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. under Floor Plans. for Phase Created. enter Level 1 . all of the building model elements. 18 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 . under Floor Plans. Because this is a renovation project. 20 In the Rename dialog.Existing.Existing. and click Rename. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Design Bar. enter Level 1 . After you create the views. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. and click OK. including the door tags.

On a logical time line. select Existing. click the Phase Filters tab. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. 24 In the Project Browser. There are five default phase filters. under Phasing. Existing.Demo. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. for Phase. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. to which all the building model elements belong. enter Composite Plan. 21 In the Project Browser. however.Existing. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. 27 Click New. select Overridden. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Demolished. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Level 1 . 26 In the Phasing dialog. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. double-click Level 1 . you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. and Temporary. Later in this exercise. you modify these settings. under New. 28 Under Filter Name. Because of this time relationship. In this case. under Floor Plans. new construction occurs after existing construction.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. Next. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. 29 For Composite Plan. Phase status is time-dependent. You may need to zoom in to see this.

click (Demolish).Demo. under Floor Plans. When you demolish the host. There are two ways to demolish an element. you begin demolition. you demolish all elements hosted by it. select the interior walls one at a time. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. 32 In the Demolished row. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. Phasing Your Model | 765 . 36 Using the same method. click the value for Color. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. its display changes to a red dashed line. or you can use the demolish tool. under Floor Plans. select red. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. 34 In the Color dialog. under Cut ➤ Lines. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. 35 Click OK twice. As you click each wall. 39 In the Phasing dialog. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. double-click Level 1 .Existing.31 Under Phase Status. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. select the line style. Next. click OK. select a lighter blue. 42 In the Project Browser. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. double-click Level 1 . select Demolished. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase.

48 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Basic Wall: Interior . under Phasing. under Phasing. for Phase Filter. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 52 Open Level 1 . Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 51 Add a door leading into each room. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 53 Open Level 1 . 55 In the Element Properties dialog. click Door. and click OK. and click OK. 49 On the Design Bar. for Phase Filter. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 50 In the Type Selector. click Wall. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 In the Type Selector. select Show Previous + New. The demolished walls no longer display. add a long horizontal wall.Existing.Demo. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr).

and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. right-click Level 1 .New. 60 On the View toolbar. 59 Open Level 1 .New. The renovated building model plan is displayed. click (Default 3D View). because the phase filter is set to Show All. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. All elements are displayed in this view. 62 If necessary. regardless of phase. Phasing Your Model | 767 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. 57 In the Project Browser. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.Demo. which are displayed as red. 61 On the View Control Bar. and existing shows as half-tone. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. new is shown in blue.

room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. and click OK. In this view. 63 Close the file. expand Views (all). you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. you do not need to change the project units to metric. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. In this exercise.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. 2 Open Level 1 . you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view.rvt. the rooms change in both definition and size. In the next exercise. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly.Demo. 3 Open Level 1 . NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. In this view. and new construction. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. therefore.Existing. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags.New. Notice that this view is the original building model. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. If you wish to do so. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. click Project Units. define the units. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. sizes. All room boundaries are phase-specific. demolition. expand Floor Plans. If you wish to save this file. You can also see that the room quantities. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. As the renovation process continues. and double-click Level 1 . you can do so at this time. you can see the new walls added to the building model. click Training Files. go to the Settings menu.

In the Phasing dialog.Existing.Demo. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Room. click Room Tag. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 5 Click OK. click Room. yet they have different room numbers. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 13 Open Level 1 . 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click in each room as you move to the right. 10 Open Level 1 . Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . 6 Open Level 1 . 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. and maximize the view. Use the following illustration as a guide.New. 9 On the Design Bar. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click Modify.

New Construction. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. click Tile. In addition. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. 19 On the Window menu.Existing. 18 Open Room Schedule . 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 20 Close the file. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. 17 On the Window menu. 16 In the Project Browser.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. and double-click Room Schedule . expand Schedules/Quantities. click Close Hidden Windows. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. In this case. In this exercise. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. View phase-specific room schedules. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. The two schedule views tile.

This maximizes efficiency. performance. In this tutorial. modify their visibility. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. and manage the links throughout the project. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. In the final lesson. In these situations. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. You position the building models on the site plan. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. Comparison of alternatives on a site. 771 .

Linking Building Models In this lesson. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. You link two building models to the project. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You position the building models on the site. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. and the other is a townhouse. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. One building model is a condominium. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. you open a project in which only site components have been developed.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. modify their visibility.

Manual . click Open. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. ■ ■ Manual . Click Open. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. 5 On the File menu. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.rvt. this option will place the link at a predefined location. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. 2 On the File menu. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder.■ Auto . NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. RELATED See the lesson. 4 On the File menu. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. however. c_Townhouse. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Auto . and click Properties. Otherwise. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. click Close.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. 8 Clear Read-only. in the Model Linking folder that you created. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. right-click. click Save As. this system is not exposed to the user. select the three files. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. and save the file there. Select c_Site. All three files now reside. and click OK. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . and open Common\c_Site. c_Condo_Complex. click Training Files. you can do so. This option is grayed out. click Open. with write permission.

10 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). Notice the blue detail lines. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. select Auto . and make your changes. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. expand Floor Plans. For Positioning. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Origin to Origin. 13 Click Open. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click Project Units. 11 On the File menu. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. If you wish to do so. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. and double-click Level 1. you can go to the Settings menu.

The second click specifies the move endpoint. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . 16 For the move start point. 17 For the move endpoint. After you select it. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The linked model moves as one object. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. The first click specifies the move start point. click (Move). similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. Standard move commands work with linked building models. The Move command requires two clicks.rvt displays in the Type Selector. 15 On the Edit toolbar.

the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 21 Click Open. For Positioning. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.Origin to Origin. 18 On the View menu. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. and select c_Townhouse.After you specify the location to move to. select Auto . click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 .The townhouse building model displays above the site model. click to specify the rotation start point. 23 On the Edit toolbar. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. you first specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. In this case. when the vertical line displays. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. To rotate an object. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. click (Rotate).

28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. click (Move). 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration.

31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . click (Copy). The first click specifies the start point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. 30 For the starting point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. and the second click specifies the copy-to point.

34 On the Options Bar. click . click Rotate. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 37 On the View toolbar. enter Townhouse A. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. for Name. use the Move command to make any adjustments. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 On the Edit menu. under Identity data. click (Default 3D View). and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project.

you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. they were placed too low within the site topography. click and hold Orbit. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. 2 On the SteeringWheels. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. In the next exercise. When you originally linked the files. In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. click (SteeringWheels). you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. you need this project file open and in this view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel.38 On the File menu. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. click Save. After linking the files. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. do so before continuing. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 .

expand Elevations. Click the Revit Links tab. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. In this case. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. and click to select the line. you first select the plane you want to align to. under Views (all). To do this. the status bar displays the name of the linked file.rvt. and double-click South. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. 3 In the Project Browser. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. and then select the plane that you want to align. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. In the steps that follow. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. 7 On the Tools toolbar. when it highlights. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. and click to select it. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. When using the Align command. click (Align).

12 On the View toolbar. click and hold Orbit. 9 In the Project Browser. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. under Elevations. click (Default 3D View). Both townhouses should be at the proper level. 14 On the SteeringWheels. (SteeringWheels). This would over-constrain the model. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. 15 On the File menu. click 13 On the View toolbar. double-click North. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . click Save. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. 11 Return to the South elevation view.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project.

By linked view. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. scroll down and clear Levels. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. If the Basics page is set to Custom. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. When you link a file.rvt. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. click the Revit Links tab. In the next exercise.rvt. 9 Under Visibility. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click By Host View. click Custom. you can independently control the visibility settings. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. select <Custom>. or Custom. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 10 Click OK. detail level. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. you need this project file open and in this view. do so before continuing. expand c_Townhouse. double-click South. In this exercise. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. 4 Under Visibility. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click OK. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. 8 For Annotation Categories. under Elevations. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. and the halftone settings for each linked project. click Visibility/Graphics. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 2 On the View menu. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. As you can see. display settings.

rvt. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. on the Basics tab. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. With linked files. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. In this case. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. You can click the value for Detail Level. click Visibility/Graphics. click By Host View. click the Revit Links tab. or fine. and click OK.rvt. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. medium. select Custom. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. By selecting custom under Model Categories. no detail level changes are required. Using the Custom option. and then set the detail level to coarse. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. click the Revit Links tab. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. 20 For c_Townhouse. 24 Click OK. 14 On the View menu.rvt. By default. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. expand c_Townhouse. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. under Floor Plans. 23 In the Model categories list. double-click Level 1. under Display Settings. 16 Under Visibility. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. select <Custom>.

27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. existing. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. all new.rvt. All other components are grayed out. 26 Under Display Settings. phase.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. In most cases. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. you need this project file open and in this view. demolished. 28 Select By linked view for View range. this is preferable. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. there are situations. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. In this case. select c_Townhouse. click Save. With the Show All filter applied. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. and phase filter of a specific link. under Visibility. 31 On the File menu. By default. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. you manage the linked files. click OK. on a sloped site for instance. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. However. click Custom for the Townhouse link. 25 On the Revit Links tab. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. In this case. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. 29 Click OK. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. In the next exercise. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter.

6 At the confirmation prompt. In a shared coordinate environment. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. The default path type is Relative. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified.rvt. click the Revit tab. click Yes. They supply information regarding the links. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Notice the Loaded. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. 4 Under Linked File. 3 Under Path Type. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. select c_Condo_Complex. 7 Click OK. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. In general. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. click Manage Links.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. You learn more about this in the next lesson. and Saved Path fields are read only. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. Locations Not Saved. do so before continuing. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. the link is maintained. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. 5 Click Unload. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear.

and select Specify. click the arrow next to the Open button. 8 In the Project Browser. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. right-click c_Condo_Complex. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. and click Reload. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. click Save As. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. To do this. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. the link is not loaded. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. expand Revit Links. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. If you choose not to open that workset. In these cases. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. 9 On the File menu. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. However. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. When you initially place the link.rvt. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. In general.

you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. If you have not completed the previous lesson. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. The host file consists primarily of site components. When used in conjunction with model linking. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. name the file Site_Project. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . do so before continuing. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. and save it as an RVT file. In the next lesson. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog.10 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise. In essence. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. leave the project file open in its current view. and the resulting project files. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When you share coordinates between projects. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. you are establishing a shared origin point.

If you have closed the project. open it before continuing.coordinates are used. As indicated in the Status Bar. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. Linking Building Models on page 772. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. click Open. In this case. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson.rvt and click Open. 3 In the drawing area. Select Site_Project. When you are working in the host project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Condo Complex. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. If you have not completed the lesson. do so before continuing. 2 On the Tools menu. and the resulting project files.

select Location 1. but can have multiple additional locations. 5 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. do so before continuing. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. it is placed at a specific location. These three locations can be named Lot A. you need this project file open and in this view. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. and click OK. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. even though both models originate from one linked file. On the Status Bar. and Lot C. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. click to select it. this location is not saved outside of the host project. when the edges highlight. Lot B. However. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. If you have not completed the exercise. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project.

4 Under Value. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. 7 In the Rename dialog. click . notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 12 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. enter Lot A for New. click Rename. and click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Change. click Not Shared for Shared Location. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system.2 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Select Location dialog. under Instance Parameters. . This is a one-time operation. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. under Instance Parameters. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. click Not Shared for Shared Location. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Move instance to. Record the current position as a location. and click OK. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . When constraining a link to a location. click OK. click Reconcile. In the Choose Location dialog. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared.

When you create a location. 30 On the Tools menu. 26 Click OK. and click OK. and click OK. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 19 In the Select Location dialog. select the second option. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. click Duplicate. When you release the mouse button. and click OK. 16 Click Change. Because Lot A is currently in use. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. When you relocate a project. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. the active location position is moved. select Save. The first click specifies the move start point. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. and the left townhouse resides at that location. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. Record current position as. To explicitly save a location. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. or cancel the action. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. By relocating a project. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. a warning displays. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. Save locations 21 On the File menu. you cannot redefine its location. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. and then select the townhouse project. ignore the warning. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. click the Revit tab. enter Lot B for Name. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.Notice the OK button is not active. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. Notice the OK button is still not active. click OK. make sure Lot B is selected. 23 Click Save Locations. This is a two-click process. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. click Manage Links.

In this exercise. select Save. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 33 On the Edit menu. 34 On the File menu. 36 On the File menu. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. and click OK. you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. click Close. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. NOTE In the following exercise. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Save.

Click Open. under Floor Plans. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. select Auto . When opening the linked file. double-click 1st Floor. Because this building model only has one named location. Also. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location.rvt file.rvt file. For Positioning. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. do so before continuing.By Shared Coordinates. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 .Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. The current active location is Lot A. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. if other models were linked into the same host. In addition. If you have not completed the exercises. In this exercise. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. 2 On the File menu. click Open. it is placed automatically within the host project. Select c_Condo_Complex. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.

you manage the shared locations. enter Lot C. In the next exercise. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. you create a new location. and click OK. under Graphics. orient a view to true north. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you need this project file open and in this view. click Duplicate. 6 Select Lot B. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. and click Make Current. In this exercise. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. click Manage Place and Locations. select True North for Orientation. click OK. If you have not completed the exercises. In this exercise. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. and click OK. In the host file. you can select Lot C if necessary. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. click Manage Place and Locations. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click View Properties. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. 7 Click OK. 3 In the Name dialog. do so before continuing. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. click Open. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. You can save the file if you wish. 10 On the File menu. Select Site_Project. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. If you have not completed the exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool.rvt and click Open. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. do so before continuing.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. click Close. On the Options Bar. In this exercise.

click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. select Doors. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select Count. click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields.

the schedule lists the total count for each door type. click Save. and then click OK twice. In this exercise. 14 On the File menu. click Close. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . expand Schedules/Quantities.8 Click OK. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. 12 Select Grand totals. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. select Family and Type for Sort by. and click Properties. You have completed this tutorial. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 13 On the File menu. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. right-click Door Schedule. clear Itemize every instance.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

click the Graphics tab. and your username when using worksets. which is independent of the project settings. 10 In the Options dialog. select Invert background color. 11 Under Colors. 3 In the Options dialog. 8 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and click OK. journal cleanup options. selection default options. click the Graphics tab. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you create an office template. Finally. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. Notice that the drawing area is black. and set it as your default template. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Browse. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. notification preferences. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. you modify the system environment. These settings control the graphics. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click Training Files. under Template file. In the first lesson. 6 In the New Project dialog. 803 . they are not saved to project files or template files.rte. click the value for Selection color. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. In the second lesson. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 4 Under Colors. click OK.

When an error occurs.rvt. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 26 In the Options dialog. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 15 Click OK. click Wall. and click OK. However. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. select red. clear Invert background color. 18 On the Design Bar. 14 Under Notifications. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click No. select yellow. and select the wall. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 22 When prompted to save changes. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select None.12 In the Color dialog. select One hour. 13 Click the General tab. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. and open Metric\m_Settings. click the Graphics tab. For Selection color. 19 On the Design Bar. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. For Tooltip assistance. click Training Files. click Modify. the elements causing the error display using this color.

Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. 5 Under Default path for user files. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. click Places. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. Specifying File Locations on page 805. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 4 Click Cancel. click Browse. If prompted. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. such as in a large. click Browse. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. select Normal. notice the list of library names.27 Click the General tab. centralized. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you specify default file locations. For Tooltip assistance. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. including your default project template. These files are used in the software support process. 8 Click Cancel. family template files. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Your login name displays by default. This path is set automatically during the installation process. and click Browse to select a template. TIP To view a template. Under Journal File Cleanup. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. select your preferred Save reminder interval. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). you can start a new project with that template. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 2 In the Options dialog. and click Open. and family libraries. Under Username. select the folder to save your files to by default. do not save the changes. click the File Locations tab. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 7 In the Options dialog. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Under Default template file. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. under Default path for family template files. 10 In the Places dialog. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. However.

click (Add Value). or families. and click Open. 11 In the Places dialog. saving. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. or loading a Revit Architecture file.library names and path. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In the following illustration. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. templates. and Import dialogs. Save. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. under Libraries. and click the icon side of the field. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. and select it as the library path. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. Load. When you are opening. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and change the name to My Library. and you can create new libraries.

click Edit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click the My Library icon. scroll down the list of building industry terms. specify the new location here. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. (Remove Value) to delete the library. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 In the text editor. 22 Click Places. and decal image files. If you want to relocate this path. enter sheetmtl-Cu. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. custom color files. 24 Click 25 Click OK. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. and Import dialogs. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. Save. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. 15 Under Library Name. 19 Click Cancel. This path is determined during installation. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. and click OK twice. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Load. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 28 Click OK. view the current path. If you work in a large office. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . 5 In the text editor. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 2 In the Options dialog. 23 Select My Library. click the Spelling tab. 3 Under Settings. click My Library. such as bump maps. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click OK. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. In this exercise. You can turn snap settings on and off. click Edit. do not save the changes. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you modify snap settings. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. you modify snap increments. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click default template. click Browse. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. As you zoom in and out within a view. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Restore Defaults. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. If prompted. 4 In the New Project dialog. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 Under Personal dictionary. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. work with snapping turned off. 22 In the text editor. 21 In the text editor. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.rte. 2 In the New Project dialog. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. 14 Click in the drawing area. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project.11 In the Options dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click the Spelling tab. 19 Under Settings. click Text. 23 In the Options dialog. under Template file. delete sheetmtl-CU. 18 In the Options dialog. click OK. click Training Files. click OK.

7 Under Object Snaps. clear Chain. and move the cursor to the right. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. zoom out until it does so. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.. such as ZO to zoom out. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. For example. TIP To zoom while sketching. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. If it does not. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. If you do not have a wheel button. 8 In the Snaps dialog. While sketching. click OK. enter SM. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. use the wheel button on your mouse. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. click Wall.6 Under Dimension Snaps. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and enter 500 .

Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. and delete the value 500 . and click Wall. it will snap to the endpoints.. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and do not save the file. and specify the wall endpoint. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. the midpoint. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 21 Move the cursor downward. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Do not set the wall end point. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 24 Click OK. click Modify. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. and move the cursor to the right. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. This is the increment that you added previously. 18 Enter SM. Notice that snapping is once again active. If you move the cursor along the wall. and the wall edges. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.

In the steps that follow.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson.rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. annotations. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When you apply a material to an element. You create and modify materials. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Using these options. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. Finally. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. lines. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . you render a region to observe the changes. fill patterns. and open Metric\m_Settings. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. save the project file with a unique name. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. and object styles. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise.

When you change properties of a render appearance. and click OK. In the steps that follow. 13 Select the lower exterior wall.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. and click OK. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Masonry . However. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 9 Click Apply. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. The properties describe the color. 3 Click (Duplicate). 6 Click Replace. 11 Click OK. and double-click 02 Entry Level.Fieldstone.Stone. scale. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 2 Scroll down the materials list. select Stone.Fieldstone. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file.Fieldstone material. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . The Render Appearance Library is a local. read-only library for render appearances. and select Masonry . and texture of the material. In the Materials dialog. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. this material provides a starting point for the new material. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. When a model element is loaded into a project. and click (Element Properties). This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. enter Masonry . In the next exercise. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. 10 Click the Graphics tab. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. These details will display in rendered images. for Class. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material.

click (Default 3D View). select Masonry . 17 For Structure. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.14 In the Element Properties dialog.Brick. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. 15 Click Duplicate. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 18 For Finish 1. click This is the material that you created. click Edit/New. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 24 In the Type Selector. 21 Click OK three times. 19 On the right side of the Material field. select the rear exterior wall. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . . click in the Material field. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. and click OK. 23 While pressing CTRL. 22 Select the left exterior wall.Fieldstone. 16 Enter the new wall name. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style. 20 In the Materials dialog. 26 On the View Control Bar.Fieldstone. click Edit. 25 On the View toolbar. Fieldstone on CMU.

TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 28 In the Rendering dialog. click Rendering Dialog. and click Rendering. for Setting. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. right-click the Design Bar. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select Low or Medium.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. select Region. The rendering process begins. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. In the following exercise. 31 In the Rendering dialog. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select the render region (a red rectangle). under Quality. click Render. When finished. 29 In the 3D view.

34 Close the Rendering dialog.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Then click Render again. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Zoom into the model.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and double-click West. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. expand Elevations. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. choose Model. select Custom. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. in the Rendering dialog. 33 In the Rendering dialog. 5 Click New. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. such as steel. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. click Show the model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. m_Settings-in progress. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. and clear Region. 3 Under Pattern Type. click Import. click Show the model. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. 7 Under Custom. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model.

13 On the Options Bar. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. enter Fieldstone. (Element Properties). click OK. click Modify. 23 On the Design Bar. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. click 15 For Structure. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and for Import scale. select fldstn. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click Training Files. 22 Click OK three times. 21 In the Materials dialog. 11 Click OK. click in the Material field.56. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. In the Materials dialog.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 10 For Name. 18 Under Surface Pattern. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. enter . click to select a fill pattern.Fieldstone. select Model. 9 Under Custom. click Edit/New. click Edit. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .pat.Fieldstone material. and click OK. click . and click OK. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . under Pattern Type. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. for Finish 1. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. click (Default 3D View). and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. Controlling Object Styles on page 817.rvt. For example. there are often multiple window types within a project. you can set the window frame material to By Category. expand 3D Views. and double-click 3 Windows. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser.25 On the View toolbar. TIP If the pattern does not display. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. adjust your zoom settings as needed. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 On the keyboard.

and click . for Trim Exterior Material. 16 On the Design Bar. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 9 Click OK twice. click in the Value column. 5 On the Options Bar. 10 Select the arched window. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. click By Category. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. . 14 In the Materials dialog. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. click Modify. click Edit/New. 11 On the Options Bar.3 On the View Control Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click Edit/New. under Materials and Finishes. click By Category (located under the materials list). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and click 15 Click OK twice. for Trim Exterior Material. click (Element Properties). 8 In the Materials dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.

and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. 28 Under Shading. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. and select Trim. click in the Material column. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. or keywords include the word red. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. click OK.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 19 For Trim. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. 29 In the Materials dialog. for Class. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. type red. When you render a 3D view. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. (Duplicate). descriptions. and click OK. 25 In the search field. and click OK. for Name. 18 On the Model Objects tab. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab.red paint. click OK. expand Windows. select Paint. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. select Trim. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 23 Click Replace. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . 30 In the Object Styles dialog. . enter Trim .

5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. m_Settings-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress. enter Roof Line. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 9 In the Object Styles dialog.31 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D view). Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 7 On the View Control Bar. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 11 For Line Pattern. select Roof Line. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. is open with the 3D view active. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. Now that you have created a line pattern. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. under Category. select Red. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof.rvt. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. for Name. click New. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line.rvt. 10 For Line Color. select Roofs.

12 Click OK. click Model Graphics Style. but not the line pattern. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. 14 On the View Control Bar. double-click to Building. Notice that the line color displays in this view. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . under 3D Views. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. 13 In the Project Browser.

sections. 20 Click OK. select Roofs. select 5. select Black. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. elevations. under Floor Plans. select Roof Line. 19 For Line Pattern. click Override. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. select Roofs. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. For Color. select Solid. For Pattern. Plans. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Visibility. double-click 03 Roof. under Category.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 18 For Line Color. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Blue. 22 On the Model Categories tab.

34 On the Options Bar. select Zoning Setback. select 2. For Line Color. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 31 Click OK. click New. For Line Pattern. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . 30 For the Zoning Setback category. (Line). Click Click (Draw). 28 In the Line Styles dialog. specify the following: ■ For Plane. 33 In the Type Selector. This places the line above the topography. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. and click OK. select Red. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. under Modify Subcategories.25 Click OK twice. 29 For Name. enter Zoning Setback. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select Level: 02 Entry Level. select Double dash. click Lines.

and clear Zoning Setback. expand Lines. 39 Click OK. NOTE If Site is not selected. and then clear Property Lines. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. and clear Property Lines. 36 On the View toolbar. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. double-click 02 Entry Level. Modifying Annotations on page 825. 40 In the Project Browser. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. Expand Site. under Floor Plans. select it. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . (Default 3D View). 44 On the View toolbar. and clear Zoning Setback. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Default 3D View).NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. 43 Click OK. 38 On the Model Categories tab.

Modifying Annotations | 825 . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. click Duplicate. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. select Linear . 4 Enter the name Linear . (Undo). For Units. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. for Units Format. click one wall. m_Settings-in progress. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall.Imperial. 9 In the Type Selector. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. select Feet and fractional inches. 7 Click OK twice. click the default value.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. double-click 02 Entry Level. click another wall. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 10 On the Standard toolbar. and then click outside the second wall. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.rvt.Imperial and click OK. To place a dimension. click Dimension. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. 5 Under Text. m_Settings-in progress. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. You have created a new dimension style. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. and place a dimension on the floor plan.

In the steps that follow. notice that the label displays 1i.rfa. Leave M_Window Tag . click (Element Properties). 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. click Tag ➤ By Category. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 28 On the Design Bar. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.14 On the Options Bar. scroll down to Windows.Number is now the assigned tag. click Training Files. Then press Delete. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . 23 Click OK. 27 On the west wall. select the 3 window tags. 19 Click Load. 26 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . 22 Under Loaded Tags. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 21 In the Tags dialog. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project.Number. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. In the preview image.Number as the assigned tag. clear Leader. click the bottom window. click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 While pressing CTRL. 18 In the Tags dialog. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.Number. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click M_Window Tag . 16 Click Cancel. under Category.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. verify that Create is clear. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. 3 In the Format dialog. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. Unless overridden. for Length. the other displays the instance value. select Openings. In the second section. 31 On the Design Bar. Unless overridden. Specifying Units of Measurement. and click OK. select meters squared. select To the nearest 100. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 9 Under Doors and Windows. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. for Rounding.Temporary Dimensions. For Unit symbol. dimensions use these project settings. In the first section. and click OK. Specifying Units of Measurement. select 0 decimal places. select Faces. click the default value. and Detail Level Options | 827 . The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. 6 Click OK. (Default 3D View). Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 4 In the Project Units dialog. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Specifying Units of Measurement.Under Category. notice Window Tags appears twice. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. In the final section. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. 32 On the View toolbar. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. 8 Under Walls. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. and Detail Level Options on page 827.Temporary Dimensions.Number. dimension values display using this setting. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. click Modify. 30 Under Leader. m_Settings-in progress.rvt. and click OK. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. you specify the project units of measurements. you modify the detail level assignments. Temporary Dimensions. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. M_Window Tag . for Area. Click OK. 2 In the Project Units dialog. click the default value.

The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets.In this project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project.rvt. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. In this exercise. and expand 3D Views. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. In this table. You do not select a view scale to move it. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. click . you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. click Training Files.

In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 6 In the Project Browser.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. and click OK. expand each view type. In the Project Browser.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. select Type/Discipline. and click OK.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . 2 In the Project Browser.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . 8 Select Phase. expand Sheets (all). notice that views are grouped by phase. select Discipline. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 5 On the Views tab. and click Apply. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 10 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. under Sheets. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click New. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. and click OK. 16 Click the Views tab. click the Folders tab. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 12 Click the Sheets tab. expand each sheet set. 14 In the Project Browser.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. the same rules apply. Creating an Office Template on page 831. and open Metric\Templates. expand Complete. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. levels. When you create new projects. 2 Under Template file. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. and expand both Architectural and Structural. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. If you want to save this file. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. Whenever you create a new project or template. Creating an Office Template | 831 . and view names. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. expand 3D Views. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and click Open. In that case. When you create a new template based on an existing template. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. click Browse. You can choose from several templates. dimensions styles. View Type (Family and Type). you select the starting point for your office template. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. and click OK. click Training Files. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. For example.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. when you create a new project. and Discipline. In this lesson.rte template. navigate to your preferred directory. and click OK. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. In the lesson that follows. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can also save these settings in a template file. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Proceed to the next lesson. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. you create an office template. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. enter a unique file name. 21 In the Project Browser. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. under Views. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point.

navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 12 Under Template File. If you want to use a template other than the default. 6 Click OK. and double-click North. 14 Click Open. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. you can select it now. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. In this exercise. drag a zoom region around the level heads. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.5 In the New Project dialog. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. close them. 7 In the Project Browser. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. select Project template. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. If you have additional projects open. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click Browse. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. in the drawing area. you modify the project settings for your new template. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. For example. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. weights. and click OK. When you create the material. select Project. for Create new. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. 13 Select the default template. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. 9 In the Project Browser. 15 Under Create new.

or refer to the online help. You do this by defining the render appearance. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and materials for model objects. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. and imported objects. including color. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. you can set line weights. If you change render appearance properties. the changes are saved as part of the project template. line colors. 9 Click OK when finished. Observe the materials that are already defined. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. or modify existing patterns. and change render appearance properties. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. or refer to the online help. rotate. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 13 If necessary. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. When you create or modify a material. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. For more information. TIP For more information about creating new materials. and move model patterns. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. You can align. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. transparency. In the Object Styles dialog. see the previous lesson. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. and scroll through the list of categories. Modifying System Settings on page 803. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. create new subcategories. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. specific modifications are not dictated. texture. For more details on modifying these settings. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. 2 Scroll down the materials list. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. and similar attributes. 4 Click Replace. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. create and modify them as needed. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. see a preview of the rendered material. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. annotation objects. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials.During this exercise. line patterns.

name the style. and click Edit. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. modify the line weight. You can add and delete view scales. create new line subcategories. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. To see the details of a particular style. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. and specify the properties. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. or line pattern as needed. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 19 If necessary. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 34 Click OK. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style.15 Modify categories. 20 Click OK. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. and create new subcategories as needed. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. line color. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. click Duplicate. 29 Click OK. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. and dimensions. tags. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 32 To modify a line pattern. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 18 For existing line categories. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. select it. such as section lines and dimension lines. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select it from this list.

click Format. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. TIP In the drawing area. 55 Click OK. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. name the style. In the Tags dialog. 53 For Length. 61 Under Doors and Windows.40 Click OK. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. For example. 62 Click OK. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. select it from this list. Linear. angular. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. and Angle settings. 58 Click OK. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 46 Click OK. when you add a door with the tag option selected. Volume. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. click Load. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 57 Specify the Slope option. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 60 Under Walls. 50 To load new annotation tags. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. and click OK. click Duplicate. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. and specify the properties. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. To see the details of a particular style. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. and choose a decimal symbol.

or edit existing organization types. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. Using the arrows between the columns.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Use the table below as a checklist. create new browser organization types. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. Each command is available on the Settings menu. 68 Delete. You can find additional information in Help. or Fine. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. To move the view scales. 65 Click OK. click the Views tab. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. In such a case. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. rename. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . For example. Although these settings can be saved within a template. and move view scales as needed. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. or edit existing organization types. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. However. 70 Click the Sheets tab. create new browser organization types. 64 Review the table. click the arrows between columns. See Setting up If necessary. The detail level is based on view scale. Medium. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. Links to associated tutorials are provided. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 69 If necessary. 71 Delete. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. 72 If necessary. 73 Click OK. rename. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. When you create a new view. In a typical project.

However. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . 75 Proceed to the next exercise. or add to this selection. notice the list of doors already loaded. you can set the default contour line interval. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. For example. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. 2 In the Type Selector. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. phase filters. If necessary. For example. you can move onto the next component type. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. modify. If this selection is satisfactory. or use the Project Browser. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. Although the options are endless. In addition. click Door. and the poche depth. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. the section cut material. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. do so before starting this exercise. you could load detail components. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. Depending on the intended use of this template. You can load any family or group into a template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. and electrical fixtures. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. title blocks. In the steps that follow. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. if you load every available window type. or electrical fixtures. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. Although this is possible. furniture. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you can set up the phases. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. you may want to delete. there are some important thoughts to consider. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. you do both. If you have not completed the previous exercise.

and click OK. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Modify type properties. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. and click OK. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. or load a new door type. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Click Duplicate. create. Select it. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Make modifications.3 To modify. and click Open. In the Element Properties dialog. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. click Load. click Bar. Enter a name. Notice that each family category is listed. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. or modify a door. click Edit/New. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. create. In the Element Properties dialog. expand Families. and click OK. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. click Edit/New. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. Detail Level. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. In addition. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. To do so. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. you create the views required for your template. and click Delete. click 12 Click Preview. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. Discipline. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. create. In this exercise. 11 On the Options Bar. In addition. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. This title block is currently part of the template. View Range. and select the title block type. To load a title block. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block.) 10 Expand the title block. 13 Click OK. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . or modify any component families or groups as necessary. (Element Properties). 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. you created new projects using different templates. click Load. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. right-click the component. load. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded.

14 Select the Architectural Plan template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 2 Under Names. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. In this exercise.settings of categories and subcategories. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. and double-click Level 1. double-click Level 2. double-click South. and click OK. 4 If necessary. 12 In the Project Browser. At any time. under Floor Plans. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 11 Click Apply. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. and then click OK. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. and apply the appropriate template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 15 In the Project Browser. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. the view is not linked to the template in any way. 6 Click OK. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. select Site Plan. click Apply. Every time a new plan view is created. you can apply a view template to any view. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 18 If you modified any other view templates. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. you will first modify view templates. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. open the view from the Project Browser. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. and click OK. After applying the template. In addition. select Architectural Plan. under Elevations. click Apply. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. These values represent the starting point for each plan view.

Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. in the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. and select the desired direction. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. 27 Create additional levels as needed. If you want to modify view properties. review the existing floor plans. and click Rename. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. Black level heads have no associated views. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. right-click the ViewCube. 30 In the Project Browser. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. To orient the 3D view to a direction. If it does not display. notice that you have the option to rename. duplicate. in the shortcut menu. and click Properties. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. right-click the ViewCube. 20 In the Project Browser. review the floor plans. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Notice the level names. right-click {3D}. under Floor Plans. or delete them as needed. ceiling plans. and click Save View. click 29 In the Project Browser. a face. right-click Level 1. or delete this view. Blue level heads have associated plan views. under Floor Plans. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . click Schedule/Quantities. and. use the ViewCube. under 3D Views. or an edge of the ViewCube. on the View toolbar. right-click the ViewCube. and elevations. select Make Plan View. 23 To add more levels to the template. Rename. click Orient to a Direction. 24 On the Options Bar. right-click the view name. If prompted. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. (Default 3D View). 31 Rename the 3D View. enter a view name. 22 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. By default. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. click Orient to View. duplicate. and select the desired view. To orient the 3D view to another view. click Level.

txt for AutoCAD. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. click Sheet. and click OK. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. assign filters. On the Appearance tab. expand Sheets (all). click Add View. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. and click Rename. You are prompted to select a title block. You can still add views to the sheet. 42 Create new sheets as needed. modify settings as needed. 37 Click OK. On the Formatting tab. select the category type. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. and click OK. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. When you import a DWG or DXF file. modify settings as needed. select the default title block. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. select the title block and delete it. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. Select a view. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . After the sheet is created. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Right-click the sheet name. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.You can add schedules to a template. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. To do so. and modify their properties accordingly. To later add a title block to a sheet. in the Project Browser. 40 To add views to the sheet. modify settings as needed. or exportlayersdgn. select and order required fields. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. select one.txt for MicroStation). click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. On the Filter tab. and click Add View to Sheet. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. and click OK.

You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. You can save these mappings to a text file. 5 For each category. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. windows. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. therefore. When scheduling. When you import a DWG or DXF file. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. name the file. and click Save. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . 9 Click Save As. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. doors. Using shared parameters. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. For example.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. and click Save. select Save As. When you create a multi-category schedule. and click Save. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. and so on. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. 2 For each category. and they become the set mappings for the project. for example. project parameters. and related multi-category tags and schedules. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. click Save As. They cannot be shared with other projects. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. name the file. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. 8 In the dialog. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. name the file. and so on. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. These settings are retained within the project template. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation.

click Add. 16 Under Parameter Data. select Project parameter. project parameters. 10 Click OK. 3 Name and save the file. enter a parameter name. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. add required parameters. 25 Click Select. and click OK. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 26 Click OK. because each office has a unique set of needs. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 18 Under Type of Parameter. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. you may want to save the file to a network location. and choose a shared parameter. 9 Name the parameter. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 23 Add project parameters as needed. 8 Under Parameters. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. click New. and select Shared Parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 19 Under Group parameter under. 21 Under Categories. 24 To add a shared project parameter. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 22 Click OK. 2 Click Create. for Name. you can create a list of parameters. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. For each parameter group. 5 Enter the group name.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 11 For each parameter group. select a parameter discipline type. select a parameter value type. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 17 Under Discipline. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 14 Click Add. click New. under Groups. If this template will be used by multiple team members. select a group to add parameters to. and specify its discipline and type. If a file already exists.

click OK. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . select a printer for which you want to create named settings. For each printer. select the tag. you can load them into the template. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. and print. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. 2 Under Printer. and click OK. By creating named settings within the template. and make it your default template file. 6 In the New dialog. make minor modifications if necessary. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 37 When you have completed the schedule. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. select Multi-Category. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. 4 Modify the printer settings. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. or refer to the online help. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. In this exercise. and click Open. you can set options such as sheet sizes. enter a name for the schedule. By going first to the Print command. For information on creating multi-category tags. click Schedule/Quantities. 32 Navigate to the directory. Click OK.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. save the file as a template. 35 For Name. for Name. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. click Setup. and the percent of actual size. 28 Click OK. 5 Click Save As. you need only select a setting. 34 For Category. paper placement. The tag is now part of the template. 3 Under Settings. you create named print settings.

The only remaining task is to save it. click Save as. click Setup. This can provide a good starting point for a template. In this lesson. In addition. loaded components. and click Open. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 15 Name the template. you modified settings. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. Your template is complete. and saved them to a template. 14 Under Save as type. 9 In the Print dialog. 11 Click Close when finished. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 24 Navigate to the template location. If you have a project. and click OK. select Template Files (*. and create new settings for this printer. 23 For Default template file.rte). TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. you ensure that office standards are maintained. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. enter a new name for the printer. click Browse. and click Save. 18 Click Browse. and click Open. You can also set this template as your default template. 20 Click OK. By investing the time to individualize your template. 19 Select the template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. modify the printer settings. If you need to share this file with others. 22 Click the File Locations tab. save it in a network location. select it. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 25 Click OK. select a different printer. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. In addition. Create additional settings as needed. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful